769603

Marantz AV7705 Handleiding

297
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/332
Pagina verder
.
AV Pre Tuner
AV7705
Owner’s Manual
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
1
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Accessories 8
Inserting the batteries 9
Operating range of the remote control unit 9
Features 10
High quality sound 10
High performance 12
Easy operation 16
Part names and functions 17
Front panel 17
Display 22
Rear panel 26
Remote control unit 30
Connections
Speaker installation 35
Connecting a power amp 43
Before connecting a power amp 43
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings 48
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers 50
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers 51
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers 55
Connecting 11.1-channel speakers 62
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front
speakers 68
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers 69
Connecting a TV 70
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC
(Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 71
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC
(Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 73
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector 74
Connecting a playback device 75
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 76
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 77
Connecting a video camcorder or game console 78
Connecting a turntable 79
Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector 80
Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 81
Connecting an FM/AM antenna 82
Connecting to a home network (LAN) 84
Wired LAN 84
Wireless LAN 85
Connecting an external control device 86
REMOTE CONTROL jacks 86
DC OUT jacks 87
Connecting the power cord 88
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
2
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playback
Basic operation 90
Turning the power on 90
Selecting the input source 90
Adjusting the volume 91
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 91
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 91
Playing a USB memory device 92
Playing files stored on USB memory devices 93
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 96
Playing music from Bluetooth device 97
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 99
Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device 100
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 101
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 102
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune) 104
RDS Search 104
PTY Search 105
TP Search 106
Radio text 106
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode) 107
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
Preset Memory) 107
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory) 108
Listening to preset stations 108
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name) 109
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) 110
Cancelling Preset Skip 111
Listening to Internet Radio 112
Listening to Internet Radio 113
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 114
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 115
Getting the HEOS App 118
HEOS Account 119
Playing from streaming music services 120
Listening to the same music in multiple rooms 123
AirPlay function 127
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad 128
Playing iTunes music with this unit 128
Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit
of this unit 129
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple
synced devices (AirPlay 2) 130
Spotify Connect function 131
Playing Spotify music with this unit 131
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
3
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Convenience functions 132
Adding to HEOS Favorites 133
Playing back HEOS Favorites 133
Deleting a HEOS Favorites 134
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust) 135
Adjusting the tone (Tone) 136
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select) 137
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) 138
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) 139
Selecting a sound mode 140
Selecting a sound mode 141
Direct playback 142
Pure Direct playback 142
Auto surround playback 143
Description of sound mode types 144
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal 148
HDMI Control function 152
Setting procedure 152
Smart Menu function 153
Sleep timer function 155
Using the sleep timer 156
Smart select function 157
Calling up the settings 158
Changing the settings 159
Panel lock function 160
Disabling all key button operations 160
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME 160
Canceling the Panel lock function 161
Remote lock function 162
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit 162
Enabling the remote sensor function 162
Switches light illumination on/off 163
Web control function 164
Controlling the unit from a web control 164
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room) 166
Connecting ZONE 166
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 169
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
4
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Settings
Menu map 171
Menu operations 175
Audio 176
Center Level Adjust 176
Subwoofer Level Adjust 176
Bass Sync 177
Surround Parameter 177
M-DAX 182
Audio Delay 183
Volume 184
Audyssey®185
Graphic EQ 188
Video 190
Picture Adjust 190
HDMI Setup 192
Output Settings 197
Component Video Out 201
On Screen Display 201
4K Signal Format 202
TV Format 204
Inputs 205
Input Assign 205
Source Rename 207
Hide Sources 207
Source Level 208
Input Select 209
Speakers 210
Audyssey® Setup 210
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup) 212
Error messages 218
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings 220
Manual Setup 221
Amp Assign 221
Speaker Config. 227
Distances 232
Levels 234
Crossovers 235
Bass 236
Front Speaker 237
2ch Playback 237
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
5
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Network 240
Information 240
Connection 240
Wi-Fi Setup 241
Settings 243
Network Control 245
Friendly Name 245
Diagnostics 246
HEOS Account 247
You have not signed in 247
You have already signed in 247
General 248
Language 248
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup 248
Zone Rename 251
Smart Select Names 251
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 251
Auto Standby 252
Front Display 253
Firmware 254
Information 257
Usage Data 258
Save & Load 259
Setup Lock 259
Reset 260
Operating external devices with the remote control unit 261
Registering preset codes 262
Operating devices 265
Initializing registered preset codes 268
Setting the back light 269
Disabling the backlight 269
Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit 270
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
6
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Tips
Tips 272
Troubleshooting 274
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 275
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 276
Display on this unit shows nothing 276
No sound comes out 277
Desired sound does not come out 278
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 281
No video is shown on the TV 282
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 284
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed
on the television is different from normal 284
AirPlay cannot be played back 285
USB memory devices cannot be played back 286
Bluetooth cannot be played back 287
The Internet radio cannot be played back 288
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 289
Various online services cannot be played 290
The HDMI Control function does not work 290
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network 291
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 292
Update/upgrade error messages 293
Resetting factory settings 294
Resetting network settings 295
Appendix
About HDMI 296
Video conversion function 299
Playing back a USB memory devices 301
Playing back a Bluetooth device 302
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS 303
Playing back Internet Radio 304
Personal memory plus function 304
Last function memory 304
Sound modes and channel output 305
Sound modes and surround parameters 307
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes 310
Explanation of terms 313
Trademark information 322
Specifications 324
Index 329
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
7
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product.
To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
.
Quick Start Guide Safety Instructions Notes on radio Cable labels
Power cord FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna
External antennas for
Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity
Sound calibration
microphone stand
Cautions on Using Batteries
Remote control unit
(RC037SR)
R03/AAA batteries
Sound calibration
microphone
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
8
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Inserting the batteries
1Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and
remove it.
.
2Insert two batteries correctly into the battery
compartment as indicated.
.
Batteries
3Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
0To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
0Do not use two different types of batteries.
0Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long
periods.
0If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control
unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
.
30° 30°
Approx. 7 m
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
9
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Features
High quality sound
0Current feedback amplifier
This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifier circuit for its
preamplifier so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other
equipment that support high-definition audio formats can be amplified
with high fidelity. The high-speed current feedback amplifier also
reproduces a natural sound space.
0Dolby Atmos (v p. 314)
This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio
format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced
by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an
incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.
0DTS:X (v p. 317)
This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X brings
the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object
based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. The
flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small and
moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before leading
to a richer immersive audio experience.
0DTS Virtual:X (v p. 317)
DTS Virtual:X technology features DTS’s proprietary virtual height and
virtual surround processing to deliver an immersive sound experience
from any type of input source (stereo to 7.1.4 channel) and speaker
configuration.
zDTS Virtual:X is not for use when Height speakers are connected.
0Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 187)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds
disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey
LFC™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low
frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies
psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for
listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs
the neighbors.
0Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (v p. 211)
The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level
and delay for each subwoofer individually.
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first
compensating for any level and delay differences between the two
subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both
subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
10
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0Auro-3D
This unit is equipped with an Auro-3D decoder.
With Auro-3D, Front Height (FHL + FHR), Surround Height (SHL + SHR) and Top Surround (TS/optional) are added to a conventional 5.1-channel
system to achieve a natural and realistic sound field that is three-dimensional and fully immersive.
You will be able to fully enjoy Auro-3D playback if you properly place the speakers for Auro-3D.
2 Auro-3D playback
.
FHL FHR
SHL SHR
TS
FL FR
SW
SL SR
C
2 Dolby Atmos playback
.
FHL FHR
SHL SHR
TS
FL FR
SW
SL SR
C
0Auro-3D does not support a Dolby Atmos configuration using Top Front, Top Middle or Top Rear speakers.
But it is possible to support both an Auro-3D and Dolby Atmos by adding Front Height and Rear Height speakers* to a 5.1 configuration.
zFor an optimum Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are strongly recommended.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
11
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
High performance
04K 60Hz input/output supported
.
When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60
frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected
to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy
the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even
when viewing fast-moving video.
This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit
videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets
you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.
This unit also supports HDR (High Dynamic Range) and BT.2020 wide
color gamut.
0HDCP 2.2
This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.2 copyright protection standard.
0Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD
resolution) to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (v p. 199)
.
4K
Up scaling
Up to 1080p
This unit is equipped with a 4K video upscaling function that allows
analog video or SD (Standard Definition) video to be output via HDMI at
4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to
be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high
definition images for any video source.
0Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 166)
The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you
enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing
in the main room.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
12
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV
devices (8 inputs, 3 outputs)
.
83
OutIn
For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8
HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and
conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI-
equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a
third HDMI output for another room.
0eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function compatibility
The eARC function is compatible with conventional ARC function-
compatible audio formats in addition to multichannel linear PCM, Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio
formats a conventional ARC function cannot transmit.
Additionally, connecting to an eARC function-compatible television
enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio
content played from your television.
0The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to
network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 127)
.
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet
Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC.
This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
0Supports AirPlay 2® wireless audio
Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous
playback.
This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
13
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks
This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as
DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality
playback of high resolution files.
0Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out
easily (v p. 96)
.
You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your
smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.
0Multi-Room audio (v p. 139)
.
【MAIN ZONE】【ZONE2】/【ZONE3】
You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE,
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being
played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same
time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout
the whole house.
0Energy-saving design
This unit is equipped with an auto-standby function that automatically
turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce
unnecessary power use.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
14
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0Compatible with the “Marantz 2016 AVR Remote” Appz for
performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or
Android™ devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
.
Along with many new features, the graphics and user interface have
been completely overhauled. The new app gives you full control of the
AVR as well as access to its setup menu for detailed adjustments from
your phones or tablets. “Marantz 2016 AVR Remote” App also gives
you quick access to the receiver's status display, option menus,
Marantz Blu-ray Disc player control, and online owner's manual for your
convenience.
zDownload the appropriate “Marantz 2016 AVR Remote” App for your iOS or
Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi
(wireless LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.
0HEOS provides streaming music from your favorite online music
sources
.
HEOS wireless multi-room sound system that enables you to enjoy your
favorite music anywhere and everywhere around your home. By utilizing
your existing home network and the HEOS App (available for iOS,
Android and Amazon devices), you can explore, browse, and play
music from your own music library or from many online streaming music
services.
When multiple HEOS devices are connected to the same network,
HEOS devices can be grouped to play back the same music on all
devices simultaneously, or different music can be played on each
separate HEOS device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
15
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Easy operation
0“Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,
etc.
0Easy to use Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved
operability.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
16
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Part names and functions
Front panel
.
wq te r y
u
For details, see the next page.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
17
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
u
APower operation button (X)
Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is
located) on/off (standby). (v p. 90)
BPower indicator
This is lit as follows according to the power status:
0Off: Power on
0Red: Normal standby
0Orange:
0When “HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On” (v p. 192)
0When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” (v p. 194)
0When “Network Control” is set to “Always On” (v p. 245)
CINPUT SELECTOR knob
This selects the input source. (v p. 90)
DMain display
This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 22)
ERemote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
FVOLUME knob
This adjusts the volume level. (v p. 91)
GDoor
When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press
the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers
when closing the door.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
18
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
With the door open
.
u ow
qer iy
t
ADYNAMIC EQ button
This switches the Dynamic EQ settings. (v p. 186)
BPURE DIRECT button/indicator
This switches the sound mode between Direct, Pure Direct and Auto.
(v p. 142 – 143)
This lights when the Pure Direct mode is selected as the sound mode.
CM-DAX button/indicator
This enables the M-DAX mode. (v p. 182)
This lights when the M-DAX mode is selected.
DDynamic Volume button (DYNAMIC VOL)
This switches the Dynamic Volume settings. (v p. 187)
ESub display
This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 24)
FBACK button
This returns to the previous screen.
GCursor buttons (uio p)
These select items.
HENTER button
This determines the selection.
ISETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 175)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
19
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q6 Q7Q5
JMOVIE button
This switches the sound mode to “Movie”. (v p. 141)
KMUSIC button
This switches the sound mode to “Music”. (v p. 141)
LGAME button
This switches the sound mode to “Game”. (v p. 141)
MInformation button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 258)
NSLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 155)
OHDMI OUT button
This sets the HDMI monitor output. (v p. 192)
PDIMMER button
Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 253)
QSTATUS button
Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the
display.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
20
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q8
Q9
W0
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
RZONE SELECT button
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit. (v p. 169, 175)
SZONE2 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE2 on/off. (v p. 169)
TZONE3 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE3 on/off. (v p. 169)
UHeadphones jack (PHONES)
This is used to connect headphones.
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer
be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT
connectors.
NOTE
0To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.
VSETUP MIC jack
This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone.
(v p. 213)
WUSB port (T)
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices).
(v p. 81)
XAUX1-HDMI connector
This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 78)
YAUX1 INPUT connectors
Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 78)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
21
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Display
oMain display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
nStandard display
.
w eq
ALight illumination
When the power to this unit is switched on, the surrounding area is lit
blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not switch on.
(v p. 163)
BVolume indicator
CInput source indicator
The currently selected input source name is displayed.
If the input source name has been changed using “Source Rename” in
the menu, the input source name after the change is displayed.
(v p. 207)
nTuner display
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “Tuner”.
.
t
r
DLights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
EIn the FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo broadcasts.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
22
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nSleep timer indicator
.
y
FThis lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 155)
nZONE2/ZONE3 power on display
.
u i
GThis lights up when ZONE2 (another room) power is turned on.
(v p. 169)
HThis lights up when ZONE3 (another room) power is turned on.
(v p. 169)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
23
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSub display
.
Q
0
Q
1
Q
2
iuoyt
rewq
AInput signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.
(v p. 209)
BDecoder indicators
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or
DTS decoder is running.
CAudyssey® indicator
This lights when “MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume” or
“Audyssey LFCTM” has been set up. (v p. 185)
DTuner reception mode indicators
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “Tuner”.
TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.
RDS: Lights up when receiving RDS broadcasts.
EMonitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to
“Auto(Dual)”, the indicators light according to connection status.
FMULTI ZONE indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (another room) power is turned
on. (v p. 169)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
24
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q0 Q1 Q2
iuo
GSleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 155)
HMUTE indicator
This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 91)
IVolume indicator
JInformation display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
KFront speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
LInput/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the
setting configured for “Channel Indicators”. (v p. 253)
0When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Output” (Default)
These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
0When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Input”
These light corresponding to the channels that include the input
signals.
When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE
channel) is input.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
25
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Rear panel
.
wtyeoiuq
qQ1
r
Q2
Q
3
Q
5
Q
4
Q
6
Q
7
Q0
For details, see the next page.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
26
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
qw req
ABluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when
connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 85)
APlace the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity
evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
BTurn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.
CRotate the antenna upwards for best reception.
.
qwe
BDC OUT jacks
Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function.
(v p. 87)
CDigital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.
0“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC
(Enhanced Audio Return Channel)” (v p. 73)
0“Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI
connector” (v p. 74)
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 76)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 77)
DRS-232C connector
Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with
RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner’s manual of the home
automation controller for more information about serial control of this
unit.
Perform the operation below beforehand.
ATurn on the power of this unit.
BTurn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
CCheck that the unit is in the standby mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
27
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q0uQ1o
ty
i
EFLASHER IN jack
Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control
this unit.
FSIGNAL GND terminal
Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 79)
GNETWORK connector
Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN
network. (v p. 84)
HREMOTE CONTROL jacks
Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this
unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 86)
IVideo connectors (VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.
0“Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI
connector” (v p. 74)
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 76)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 77)
JHDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
0“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced
Audio Return Channel)” (v p. 71)
0“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC
(Enhanced Audio Return Channel)” (v p. 73)
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 76)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 77)
KAC inlet (AC IN)
Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 88)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
28
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q
2
Q
3
Q
5
Q
4
Q
6
Q
7
LFM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)
Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 82)
MAnalog audio connectors (AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 76)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 77)
0“Connecting a turntable” (v p. 79)
N7.1-channel input connectors (7.1CH IN)
Used to connect to a device that has multi-channel audio output
connectors. (v p. 80)
OBALANCED XLR PRE OUT connectors
Used to connect a power amp with BALANCED XLR input connectors.
(v p. 43)
PUNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connectors
Used to connect a power amp with UNBALANCED RCA input
connectors. (v p. 45)
QComponent video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.
0“Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI
connector” (v p. 74)
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 76)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 77)
NOTE
0Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
29
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Remote control unit
AOperation mode indicators
The “AVP” operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being
operated.
The “DEV.” indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
BAVP operation buttons (AVP CONTROL MAIN, Z2, Z3)
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit.
0“Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3” (v p. 169)
0“Menu operations” (v p. 175)
0“Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit” (v p. 270)
CDevice operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU)
These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 261)
DInput source select buttons
These select the input source.
0“Selecting the input source” (v p. 90)
0“Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3” (v p. 169)
q
w
e
r
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
30
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
EChannel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df)
These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages.
(v p. 108)
FSLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 155)
GInformation button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 258)
HCursor buttons (uio p)
These select items.
IBACK button
This returns to the previous screen.
JHOME button
This takes you to the Home screen (Top screen) when the input source is
“HEOS Music”. (v p. 93)
KSystem buttons
These perform playback related operations.
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)
These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 102)
t
o
Q0
Q1
i
u
y
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
31
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
LSMART SELECT buttons (1 - 4)
These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 157)
MSOUND MODE buttons
These select the sound mode. (v p. 140)
NNumber buttons
These enter numbers into the unit. (v p. 102)
ORemote control signal transmitter
This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
PPOWER button (X)
This turns the power on/off.
0“Turning the power on” (v p. 90)
0“Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3” (v p. 169)
QTV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 265)
RLight button
This turns on the backlight for approx. 2 seconds. (v p. 269)
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q5
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
32
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
SVOLUME buttons (df)
These adjust the volume level.
0“Adjusting the volume” (v p. 91)
0“Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3)” (v p. 170)
TMUTE button (:)
This mutes the output audio.
0“Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)” (v p. 91)
0“Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/
ZONE3)” (v p. 170)
UOPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
VSETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 175)
WENTER button
This determines the selection.
W3
W1
Q9
W2
W3
W0
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
33
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oContents
Speaker installation 35
Connecting a power amp 43
Connecting a TV 70
Connecting a playback device 75
Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 81
Connecting an FM/AM antenna 82
Connecting to a home network (LAN) 84
Connecting an external control device 86
Connecting the power cord 88
NOTE
0Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the
“Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate “Quick Start Guide”) screen for making
connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do
not conduct current.)
0Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in
noise.
oCables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to
connect.
Speaker cable
.
Subwoofer cable
.
HDMI cable
.
Component video cable
.
Video cable
.
Coaxial digital cable
.
Optical cable
.
Audio cable
.
R
L
R
L
XLR cable
.
LAN cable
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
34
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you
are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room.
Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical
installation.
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SB
SW1
SW2
SL SR
FL/FR
(Front speaker left/
right):
Place the FRONT left and right speakers an
equal distance from the main listening position.
The distance between each speaker and your TV
should also be the same.
C
(Center speaker):
Place the CENTER speaker in between the front
speakers and above or below your TV.
SL/SR
(Surround speaker left/
right):
Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an
equal distance to the left and right sides of the
main listening position. If you don’t have
surround back speakers, move the surround
speakers slightly behind your listening position.
SBL/SBR
(Surround back
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND BACK left and right
speakers an equal distance from the main
listening position and directly behind the main
listening position. When using a single surround
back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the
listening position.
SW 1/2
(Subwoofer):
Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location
near the front speakers. If you have two
subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across
the front of your room.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
35
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
FHL FHR
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
RHL RHR
TMR
TML
FHL/FHR
(Front height speaker
left/right):
Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly above the front speakers. Mount them as
close to the ceiling as possible and aim them
towards the main listening position.
TFL/TFR
(Top front speaker
left/right):
Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.
TML/TMR
(Top middle speaker
left/right):
Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers
directly above the main listening position and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TRL/TRR
(Top rear speaker
left/right):
Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly behind your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.
RHL/RHR
(Rear height speaker
left/right):
Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly behind the main listening position. Mount
them as close to the ceiling as possible and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
36
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
FHL FHR
SHL SHR
TS
FL FR
SW
SL SR
C
SHL/SHR
(Surround height
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND HEIGHT left and right
speakers directly above the surround speakers.
TS
(Top surround
speaker):
Place the TOP SURROUND speaker directly
above the main listening position and aligned with
the center channel speaker.
0For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended,
however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker
setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
37
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
FDL FDR
BDL BDR
SDL SDR
FDL/FDR
(Front Dolby speaker
left/right):
Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled
integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby
Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front
speaker.
SDL/SDR
(Surround Dolby
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled
speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby
Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround
speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
instead of the surround speaker.
BDL/BDR
(Back Dolby speaker
left/right):
Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on
the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos
Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back
speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
instead of the surround back speaker.
About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow
the sound to come from over your head by using a special upward-
pointing speaker that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where
speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
38
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider
and deeper surround sensation.
0Dolby Atmos is not supported in a 5.1-channel or less speaker configuration.
0DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration.
0Auro-3D recommends adding FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT
speakers to a 5.1 speaker configuration. Optionally, you may substitute REAR
HEIGHT, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers instead of FRONT HEIGHT and
SURROUND HEIGHT speakers for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and Auro-3D playback.
0Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be
installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.
.
z1
z2
z3
z4
z5
Point slightly
downwards
Front height
speaker
z1 30° - 45°
z4 125° - 150°
z2 30° - 55° z3 65° - 100°
z5 135° - 150°
GViewed from the sideH
Top front speaker Top rear speaker
Front speaker Surround
speaker
Surround
back
speaker
Point slightly
downwards
Rear height
speaker
Top middle / Top surround speaker Surround height speaker
0For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended,
however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker
setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
.
TS
SL
TRL
RHL RHR
FHL
TML
TFL
FL
SR
TRR
FHR
TMR
TFR
FR
C
Height speakers layout
GViewed from the topH
SHRSHL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
39
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oWhen 7.1-channel speakers are installed using
surround back speakers
.
z1
z2z3
FL
SW C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
Listening
position
z1 22° - 30° z2 90° - 110° z3 135° - 150°
0When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening
position.
oWhen 5.1-channel speakers are installed
.
z1
z2
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
z1 22° - 30° z2 120°
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
40
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oLayout including height speakers and ceiling
speakers
nHeight speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height/rear height
speakers.
.
FHL FHR
C
FL FR
SW
SL SR
RHL RHR
nCeiling speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top front/top rear speakers.
.
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
C
FL FR
SW
SL SR
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
41
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nDolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby/surround Dolby
speakers.
.
C
FL FR
FDL FDR
SW
SL SR
SDL SDR
nAuro-3D layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel speakers with Front Height/Surround
Height/Top Surround speakers.
.
FHL FHR
SHL SHR
TS
FL FR
SW
SL SR
C
0For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended,
however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker
setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
42
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a power amp
Before connecting a power amp
0Connect a power amp (sold separately) to the PRE OUT connector of
this unit.
0This unit has UNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connector and
BALANCED XLR PRE OUT connector. Connect to the correct
connector for your power amp. If your power amp has both connectors,
connect to either of them.
0Connect the speakers to the power amp.
0For details on speaker connections, see the Owner's Manual for the
power amp.
0This section shows how to make a 11.1-channel connection.
For how to make other speaker connections, see page 48.
G AV7705 BALANCED XLR PRE OUT connector PIN arrangement H
.
12
3
AGND (Ground)
BHOT (+)
CCOLD (–)
The PIN arrangement in this unit uses the European method.
In the USA method, B is COLD, and C is HOT.
When connecting a device that utilizes the USA type of PIN arrangement,
replace the B and C plugs on one side of the balanced cable.
NOTE
0Do not short the HOT and GND or COLD and GND for use.
0Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers.
Also, turn off the power amp and subwoofer.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
43
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample of connections to Marantz MM8077 power amp
nConnecting the UNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connector
When using UNBALANCED RCA connectors for connection, set the input change switch to “UNBALANCED” on MM8077.
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC FHR FHL RHR RHL
BALANCEDBALANCED
UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED
SBLSBR
【MM8077 】
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
44
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nConnecting the BALANCED XLR PRE OUT connector
When using BALANCED XLR connectors for connection, set the input change switch to “BALANCED” on MM8077.
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SR SL FR FLC FHR FHL RHR RHL
SW
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
SBLSBR
【MM8077 】
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
45
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAbout the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification
Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable.
This makes it easier to connect the speakers to the power amp.
Channel Color
FRONT L White
FRONT R Red
CENTER Green
SURROUND L Light Blue
SURROUND R Blue
SURROUND BACK L Beige
SURROUND BACK R Brown
FRONT HEIGHT L Light Yellow
FRONT HEIGHT R Yellow
TOP FRONT L Light Yellow
TOP FRONT R Yellow
TOP MIDDLE L Light Yellow
TOP MIDDLE R Yellow
TOP REAR L Light Yellow
TOP REAR R Yellow
Channel Color
SURROUND HEIGHT L Light Yellow
SURROUND HEIGHT R Yellow
REAR HEIGHT L Light Yellow
REAR HEIGHT R Yellow
FRONT DOLBY L Light Yellow
FRONT DOLBY R Yellow
SURROUND DOLBY L Light Yellow
SURROUND DOLBY R Yellow
BACK DOLBY L Light Yellow
BACK DOLBY R Yellow
TOP SURROUND Black
SUBWOOFER 1 Black
SUBWOOFER 2 Black
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
46
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.
G How to attach the cable labels H
.
Power amp
Speaker
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
47
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings
This system configuration plays back 11-channels. You can create speaker systems such as a bi-amp connection by changing the “Amp Assign” settings.
Perform “Amp Assign” settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 221)
Playback speaker in MAIN ZONE “Amp Assign” settings Connection page
5.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 50
7.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 51
9.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 55
11.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 62
9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) 9.1ch (Bi-Amp) 68
9.1-channel playback + second pair of front speakers 9.1ch + Front B 69
The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See “Sound modes and channel output” (v p. 305) for the sound
modes that are supported.
The following pages provide basic connection examples.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
48
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Refer to the example connection for “Example connection for the Auro-3D
9.1-channel system” (v p. 61) when playing Auro-3D with a 9.1-
channel system using the basic 5.1-channel system and the front height
and surround height speakers.
Also refer to the connection example for “Example connection for the
Auro-3D 10.1-channel system” (v p. 65) when playing Auro-3D with a
10.1-channel system by adding the top surround speaker.
0In addition to the connections described in p.50 - 69, this unit allows for various
speaker connections with the “Amp Assign” setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in “View Terminal Config.” on the “Amp Assign”
setting screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.
.
SUBWOOFER
HEIGHT2HEIGHT1SURR.BACKSURROUNDCENTERFRONT
12
SURROUNDSUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT SURR.BACK T.FRONT T.REAR
T.FRONTSURR.BACK T.REAR SUBWOOFERSURROUNDCENTERFRONT
Back
Speakers/Amp Assign
RCA
Assign Mode 11.1ch
XLR
FRONT SURROUNDCENTER SURR.BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
12
SUBWOOFER
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
49
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Up to 11.2-channels can be connected by using either UNBALANCED RCA connectors or BALANCED XLR connectors.
This example explains how to make a connection when using UNBALANCED RCA connectors.
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers
This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.
.
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
.
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
【MM8077 】
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
50
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers
oExample connections when using surround
back speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel
system but with surround back speakers.
.
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
SBL SBR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch & SB” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 222)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
SBLSBR
【MM8077 】
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
0When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK
L terminal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
51
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connections when using ceiling
speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel
system but with ceiling speakers.
.
C
FL FR
SW
SL SR
TML TMR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” and “Height Sp” to “2ch” in the menu when
connecting in this configuration. (v p. 222)
0The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle
speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under “Height” -
“Layout” in the menu. (v p. 224)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
TMLTMR
【MM8077 】
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
52
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connections when using height
speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel
system but with front height speakers.
.
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
FHL FHR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” and “Height Sp” to “2ch” in the menu when
connecting in this configuration. (v p. 222)
0The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In
this case, set the height speakers to be connected under “Height” - “Layout” in the
menu. (v p. 224)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
FHLFHR
【MM8077 】
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
53
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connections when using Dolby
Atmos Enabled speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel
system but with front Dolby speakers.
.
C
FL FR
SW
SL SR
FDL FDR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” and “Dolby Sp” to “2ch” in the menu when
connecting in this configuration. (v p. 222)
0The surround Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby
speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected
under “Height” - “Layout” in the menu. (v p. 224)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
FDLFDR
【MM8077 】
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
54
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to
9.1-channels at the same time.
oExample connection when using one set of
ceiling speakers
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
SL SR
TML TMR
0Set “Height” - “Height Sp” to “2ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
TMLTMR
【MM8077 】
SBLSBR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1z
zThe top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle
speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under “Height” -
“Layout” in the menu. (v p. 224)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
55
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection when using two sets of
ceiling speakers
.
C
FL FR
SW
SL SR
TRL TRR
TFL TFR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” or set “5ch & SB” and “Height Sp” to “4ch” in the
menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 222)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
TRLTRR
【MM8077 】
HEIGHT 2z
HEIGHT 1z
TFLTFR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the
settings. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
56
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection when using one set of
height speakers
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
SL SR
FHL FHR
0Set “Height” - “Height Sp” to “2ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
FHLFHR
【MM8077 】
SBLSBR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1z
zThe rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers.
In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under “Height” - “Layout” in
the menu. (v p. 224)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
57
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection when using two sets of
height speakers
.
C
FL FR
SW
SL SR
FHL FHR
RHL RHR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” or set “5ch & SB” and “Height Sp” to “4ch” in the
menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 222)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
RHLRHR
【MM8077 】
FHLFHR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1zHEIGHT 2z
zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the
settings. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
58
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection when using one set of
Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
.
C
SBL SBR
SW
SL SR
FL FR
FDL FDR
0Set “Height” - “Dolby Sp” to “2ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
FDLFDR
【MM8077 】
SBLSBR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1z
zThe surround Dolby or back Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the
front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be
connected under “Height” - “Layout” in the menu. (v p. 224)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
59
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection when using two sets of
Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
.
C
SW
SL SR
FL FR
FDL FDR
SDL SDR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” or set “5ch & SB” and “Dolby Sp” to “4ch” in the
menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 222, 223)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
SDLSDR
【MM8077 】
FDLFDR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1zHEIGHT 2z
zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the
settings. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
60
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-
channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.
.
FL FR
SW
SL SR
C
FHL FHR
SHL SHR
0Set “Floor” - “Layout” to “5ch” or set “5ch & SB” and “Height Sp” to “4ch” in the
menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 223)
Next, set “Height” - “Layout” to “Front Height & Surr. Height”. (v p. 224)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
SHLSHR
【MM8077 】
FHLFHR
HEIGHT 1z1HEIGHT 2 z1z2
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
z1You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in
the settings. (v p. 67)
z2For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are
recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a
Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
61
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting 11.1-channel speakers
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to
11.1-channels at the same time.
oExample connection when using two sets of
ceiling speakers
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
SL SR
TRL TRR
TFL TFR
0Set “Height” - “Height Sp” to “4ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC SBLSBR
TRLTRR TFLTFR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 2zHEIGHT 1z
【MM8077 】
zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the
settings. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
62
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection when using two sets of
height speakers
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
SL SR
FHL FHR
RHL RHR
0Set “Height” - “Height Sp” to “4ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC SBLSBR
RHLRHR FHLFHR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1z
HEIGHT 2z
【MM8077 】
zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the
settings. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
63
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nExample connection when using two sets of Dolby
Atmos Enabled speakers
.
C
SBL SBR
SW
SL SR
FL FR
FDL FDR
SDL SDR
0Set “Height” - “Dolby Sp” to “4ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
.
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC SBLSBR
SDLSDR FDLFDR
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1z
HEIGHT 2z
【MM8077 】
zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the
settings. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
64
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oExample connection for the Auro-3D 10.1-
channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.
.
FL FR
SW
SL SR
C
FHL FHR
SHL SHR
TS
0Set “Height” - “Height Sp” to “5ch” in the menu when connecting in this
configuration. (v p. 223)
Next, set “Height” - “Layout” to “Front Height & Surr. Height”.　 (v p. 224)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SW SR SL FR FLC
SHLSHRTS
【MM8077 】
FHLFHR
BALANCEDBALANCED
UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED
HEIGHT 1z1HEIGHT 2 z1z2
z1You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in
the settings. (v p. 67)
z2For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are
recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a
Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
65
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Channels output from the HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2 RCA connectors and HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2 XLR connectors can be changed to the following patterns
according to the speaker systems being used.
Set this from “Amp Assign” in the menu. (v p. 221)
Combination of height speakers to be used Connected connectors
Number of height/
ceiling speakers Number of Dolby
speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT1 RCA and
HEIGHT1 XLR HEIGHT2 RCA and
HEIGHT2 XLR
None None - - -
2 speakers None
Front Height Front Height -
Top Front Top Front -
Top Middle Top Middle -
Top Rear Top Rear -
Rear Height Rear Height -
4 speakers None
Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height
z
Front Height Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surr. Height
Top Front & Top Rear Top Front Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height
None 2 speakers
Front Dolby Front Dolby -
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby -
Back Dolby Back Dolby -
2 speakers 2 speakers
Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Front Height & Back Dolby Top Front Back Dolby
Top Front & Surround Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Top Front & Back Dolby Top Front Back Dolby
None 4 speakers Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Front Dolby & Back Dolby Front Dolby Back Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
66
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Combination of height speakers to be used Connected connectors
Number of
height/
ceiling speakers
Number of
Dolby
speakers
Combination pattern
HEIGHT1 RCA
and HEIGHT1
XLR
HEIGHT2 RCA SUBWOOFER 2
PRE OUT
4 speakers None Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surround Height Subwoofer 2
Front Height & Rear Height
z
Front Height Rear Height Subwoofer 2
5 speakers None Front Height & Surr. Height & Top Surround Front Height Surround Height Top Surround
Top Front & Rear Height & Top Surround
z
Front Height Rear Height Top Surround
zFor the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in
place of Surround Height speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
67
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speakers
This system plays back 9.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection
for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate
amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that
supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power
returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter
without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.
.
FHL
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
SR
SBR
FL
(Bi-Amp)
FR
(Bi-Amp)
NOTE
0When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or
wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
.
wqwq
(R) (L)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
FLFR
SW SR SLSBR SBLC FHR FHL
zz
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
【MM8077 】
zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can
be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be
connected from “Height” - “Layout” in the menu. (v p. 224)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
68
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B
as desired.
.
FHL
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
SR
SBR
FLFL
(B) (A) FRFR
(A) (B)
.
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL7
(C)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL1
(FL)
CHANNEL2
(FR)
CHANNEL3
(SL)
CHANNEL4
(SR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
CHANNEL5
(SBL)
CHANNEL6
(SBR)
SR SLSBR SBLC
FR
(A)
FL
(A)
FR
(B)
FL
(B)
SW FHRzFHLz
BALANCED
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
UNBALANCED
【MM8077 】
zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can
be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be
connected from “Height” - “Layout” in the menu. (v p. 224)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
69
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.
How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.
ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via
HDMI cable.
.
No
Yes
Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?
Yes No
Is the TV compatible with the ARC / eARC?
“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio
Return Channel)” (v p. 71)
“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return
Channel)” (v p. 73)
“Connection 3 : TV equipped without
an HDMI connector” (v p. 74)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
70
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC / eARC function to this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” or “ARC” to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 194)
Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of “HDMI Control” and “ARC”
settings in the menu.
.
(ARC)
IN
HDMI
TV
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
71
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0When using the ARC / eARC function, connect to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
0eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your
television. For more information, check your television’s owner’s manual.
0When an ARC and an eARC function-compatible televisions are connected, the eARC function-compatible television is prioritized.
0Use a “High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet” when using an ARC / eARC function-compatible television.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
72
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
.
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT IN
IN
HDMI
TV
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
73
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
.
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
IN
VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
BPR
IN
IN
TV
or
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
74
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors
(HDMI, digital audio and audio).
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.
In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 76)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 77)
0“Connecting a video camcorder or game console” (v p. 78)
0“Connecting a turntable” (v p. 79)
0“Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector” (v p. 80)
0Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See “Input Assign” on how
to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 205)
0To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” to “TV”. (v p. 192)
0To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 only.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
75
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
.
RL
RL
OUT
HDMI
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
or
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
(HDMI incompatible device)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
76
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
.
RL
RL
RL
RL
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
BPR
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
DVD player
or
Blu-ray Disc
player
(HDMI incompatible device)
DVD player
(HDMI incompatible device)
Blu-ray Disc player
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
77
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a video camcorder or game console
This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.
Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
.
OUT
HDMI
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Video
camcorder
Video camcorder
(HDMI incompatible device)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
78
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving
coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
If you set this unit’s input source to “Phono” and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise
from the speakers.
NOTE
0The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding
purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the
noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting
the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this
case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.
GND
AUDIO
OUT
LR
(MM cartridge)
Turntable
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
79
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector
You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-channel sound audio output connectors to enjoy music and video.
To play analog signals input from 7.1CH IN connectors, set “Input Mode” to “7.1CH IN”. (v p. 209)
0The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc
player/DVD player. (“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc
player” (v p. 77))
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
SUB-
WOOFER
CENTER SURROUND
BACK
RL
SURROUND
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIO
Devices with a multi-channel output connector
(Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player,
External decoder etc.)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
80
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port
For operating instructions see “Playing a USB memory device” (v p. 92).
.
USB memory
device
0Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter,
use that device’s supplied AC adapter.
NOTE
0USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
0It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
0Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
81
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting an FM/AM antenna
Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to
the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the
antenna in this location. (“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 101))
0If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an
outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the
unit.
NOTE
0Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
.
qwe
Black
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
White
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
82
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oUsing the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
.
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
When assembling, refer to “AM loop antenna assembly”.
.
oAM loop antenna assembly
1Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop
antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the
stand.
.
Projecting part
Square hole
Stand
Loop antenna
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
83
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various
types of playback and operations as described below.
0Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s)
0Playback of streaming music services
0Using the Apple AirPlay function
0Operation on this unit via the network
0Operation with the HEOS wireless multi-room sound system
0Firmware Update
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.
Wired LAN
To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the
router to this unit as shown in the figure below.
.
Internet
Modem
PC
Router
To WA N s i d e
To LAN port
To LAN port
NAS
(Network Attached
Storage)
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
84
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Wireless LAN
When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external
antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel
and stand them upright.
See “Wi-Fi Setup” on how to connect to a wireless LAN router.
(v p. 241)
.
Internet
Modem
Router with access point
To WAN side
0When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following
functions:
0Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a
speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
0Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics
stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended.
If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be
affected by noise.
0When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the
IP address, etc. in “Network”. (v p. 240)
NOTE
0The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a
computer shop for details.
0This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if
your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet
connector on your computer.
0Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
85
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
oPerforming operations by RC on this unit
without visual contact
You can connect an external IR receiver to the REMOTE CONTROL
connectors to perform operations on this unit with the supplied remote
control unit without visual contact. This might be necessary if the unit is
hidden in a cupboard or corner, so you can’t directly point with the
remote control unit to the device.
To do this, disable the remote control signal receiving function
(“Remote lock function” (v p. 162)).
.
RC OUT
IR receiver
NOTE
0When the remote control signal receiving function is disabled, you can not perform
operations with the remote control unit.
oRemotely connecting Marantz devices
When you are using a Marantz device other than this unit that supports
remote connection, you can transmit remote control signals just by
connecting the device to the REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT connector
with a monaural cable.
Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the
connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this
feature.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
86
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
DC OUT jacks
When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.
The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC/150 mA electrical signal.
.
12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device
NOTE
0Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the DC OUT jacks. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.
0If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power
to the unit, and disconnect it.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
87
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.
.
To household power outlet
Power cord (supplied)
(AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
88
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oContents
Basic operation
Turning the power on 90
Selecting the input source 90
Adjusting the volume 91
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 91
Selecting a sound mode 140
Playback a device
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 91
Playing a USB memory device 92
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 96
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 101
Playback network audio/service
Listening to Internet Radio 112
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 114
Getting the HEOS App 118
AirPlay function 127
Spotify Connect function 131
Convenience functions
Convenience functions 132
HDMI Control function 152
Smart Menu function 153
Sleep timer function 155
Smart select function 157
Panel lock function 160
Remote lock function 162
Switches light illumination on/off 163
Other functions
Web control function 164
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room) 166
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
89
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Basic operation
.
VOLUME df
POWER X
MUTE :
Input source
select buttons
Turning the power on
1Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
0You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to
turn on the power.
0You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1Press the input source select button to be played back.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
0You can also select the input source by turning INPUT SELECTOR on the main
unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
90
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the volume
1Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
0You can also adjust the master volume by turning VOLUME on the main unit.
Turning off the sound temporarily
(Muting)
1Press MUTE :.
0“MUTE” appears on the display.
0: appears on the TV screen.
0The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu. (v p. 184)
0To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player.
1Prepare for playback.
ATurn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
BChange the TV input to the input of this unit.
2Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
3Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.
oSurround playback (v p. 140)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
91
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing a USB memory device
.
USB
OPTION
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
1
8 9
3
2
0Playing back music files stored on a USB memory device.
0Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards
can be played on this unit.
0This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
0The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows.
See “Playing back a USB memory devices” (v p. 301) for details.
0WMA
0MP3
0WAV
0MPEG-4 AAC
0FLAC
0Apple Lossless
0DSD
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
92
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
1Insert a FAT32 formatted USB memory device into the
USB port.
2Press USB to switch the input source to “USB”.
3Select the name of this unit.
4Browse the music on your USB memory device and
select something to play.
0When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to
queue up your music.
Play Now:
Inserts the item into the queue after the
currently playing track and plays the
selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace
Queue:
Clears the queue and plays the
selected item immediately.
Play Next:
Inserts the item into the queue after the
current song and plays it when the
current song ends.
Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.
.
Nature 01
Nature 02
Nature 03
Nature 04
Various Artists
Various Artists
Various Artists
Various Artists
Nature 05
Various Artists
USB Music
-
Naure 01
Play Now
Play Next
Add to End of Queue
Play Now & Replace Queue
Nature
Cancel
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
93
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
5Use ui to select the “Play Now” or “Play Now &
Replace Queue”, then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
.
Nature 01
-
Various Artists
NOW PLAYING
-2:212:45
Nature
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in
the list display
HOME Go to Home screen
0
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while
playing the file.
NOTE
0
Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising
with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the
USB memory device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
94
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 135)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 136)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 137)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 139)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
95
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
.
Bluetooth
POWER X
BACK
1
8 9
3
2
OPTION
Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital
music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting
this unit with the Bluetooth device.
Communication is possible up to a range of about 30 m.
NOTE
0To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to
support the A2DP profile.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
96
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing music from Bluetooth device
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth
device must first be paired with this unit.
Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired
again.
1Prepare for playback.
AConnect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
on the rear panel. (v p. 27)
BPress POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
2Press Bluetooth.
When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode
automatically and “Pairing...” will appear on the display of the unit.
3Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.
4Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
Connect to the Bluetooth device while “Pairing” is being displayed
on the display of the unit.
Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit
(about 1 m).
5Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.
0The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote
control of this unit.
0The next time the Bluetooth button is pressed on the remote
control unit, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth
device that was connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
97
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
0Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title
name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
98
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.
1Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.
2Press and hold Bluetooth on the remote control unit for
at least 3 seconds.
This unit will go into the pairing mode.
3Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
0This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th
Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered
device.
0You can also enter pairing mode by pressing the OPTION button when the
Bluetooth playback screen is displayed and selecting “Pairing Mode” from the
displayed option menu.
NOTE
0To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth
device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
0Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Pairing with other Bluetooth devices” (v p. 99)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 135)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 136)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 137)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 139)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
99
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Reconnecting to this unit from a
Bluetooth device
After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without
performing any operations on this unit.
This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth
device for playback.
1If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate
the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device
to be connected.
3Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your
Bluetooth device.
4Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.
0The screen automatically switches to the “Bluetooth” playback screen if a
Bluetooth device is connected while the power of this unit is on.
0When the “Network Control” setting of this unit is set to “Always On” and a
Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the
unit will be turned on automatically. (v p. 245)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
100
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
.
0 – 9
TUNE +, –
OPTION
TUNER
CH/PAGE df
uio p
ENTER
BACK
You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and
AM broadcasts.
Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this
unit first.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
101
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
1Connect the antenna. (“Connecting an FM/AM
antenna” (v p. 82))
2Press TUNER to switch the input source to “Tuner”.
G TV screen H
.
STEREO AUTO
OPTION
OPTION
Tuner
FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
CH 1
G Display of this unit H
.
3Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.
This displays the reception band input screen.
5Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.
FM: When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM: When listening to an AM broadcast.
6Press TUNE + or TUNE – to select the station you want
listen to.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When
it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.
0The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically
searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in
using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also
use “Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good.
If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” mode to tune in.
Operation buttons Function
TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)
CH/PAGE d fSelects preset radio stations
u iSelects the radio station (up/down)
o pSelects preset radio stations
0 – 9 Preset channel selection /
Direct frequency tuning
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
102
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)” (v p. 104)
0“ RDS Search ” (v p. 104)
0“ PTY Search ” (v p. 105)
0“ TP Search ” (v p. 106)
0“ Radio text ” (v p. 106)
0“Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)” (v p. 107)
0“Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)” (v p. 107)
0“Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset
Memory)” (v p. 108)
0“Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset
Name)” (v p. 109)
0“Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)” (v p. 110)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 135)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 136)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 137)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 139)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
103
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Tuning in by entering the frequency
(Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3Use ui or 0 – 9 to select a number and press p.
0If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio
station you want to hear.
5When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
RDS Search
RDS is a broadcasting service which allows a station to send additional
information along with the regular radio program signal.
Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide the RDS
service.
Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible
stations.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “RDS Search”, then press ENTER.
3Press ENTER.
The search for RDS stations begins automatically.
0If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the
display, you can search for a different station.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
104
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
PTY Search
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program
type (PTY).
PTY identifies the type of RDS program.
The program types and their displays are as follows:
NEWS News WEATHER Weather
AFFAIRS Current Affairs FINANCE Finance
INFO Information CHILDREN Children’s program
SPORT Sports SOCIAL Social Affairs
EDUCATE Education RELIGION Religion
DRAMA Drama PHONE IN Phone In
CULTURE Culture TRAVEL Travel
SCIENCE Science LEISURE Leisure
VARIED Varied JAZZ Jazz Music
POP M Pop Music COUNTRY Country Music
ROCK M Rock Music NATION M National Music
EASY M Easy Listening Music OLDIES Oldies Music
LIGHT M Light Classical FOLK M Folk Music
CLASSICS Serious Classical DOCUMENT Documentary
OTHER M Other Music
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “PTY Search”, then press ENTER.
3Use ui to call out the desired program type.
4Press ENTER.
PTY search begins automatically.
0If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the
display, you can search for a different station.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
105
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TP Search
TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.
This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area
before leaving home.
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic programs (TP
stations).
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “TP Search”, then press ENTER.
3Press ENTER.
TP search begins automatically.
0If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the
display, you can search for a different station.
Radio text
RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display.
“Radio text” appears on the display when radio text data is received.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Radio text”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select “On”, then press ENTER.
0While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data
broadcast from the station is displayed.
0If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
106
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you
cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, change the mode to
“Manual” and tune in manually.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.
Auto: Automatically search for and tune to a
receivable radio station.
Manual:
Manually change the frequency one
step at a time each time the button is
pressed.
Tuning in to stations and presetting
them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)
A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
3Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset
them.
0When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about
5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
0The preset memory is overwritten.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
107
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Presetting the current broadcast
station (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them
in easily.
Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
(“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 102))
2Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4Use ui or 0 – 9 to select the channel you want to
preset, then press ENTER.
The current broadcast station that is preset.
0To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Channel Default settings
1 – 8 87.50 / 89.10 / 98.10 / 108.00 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
9 – 16 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
17 – 24 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
25 – 32 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
33 – 40 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
41 – 48 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
49 – 56 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
Listening to preset stations
1Use CH/PAGE df or 0 – 9 to select the desired preset
channel.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
108
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Specify a name for the preset
broadcast station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.
Up to 8 characters can be input.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.
The “Preset Name” screen is displayed.
3Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station
you want to name.
4Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
name, then press ENTER.
5Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.
0If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the
frequency.
6Enter the characters, then press “OK”.
7Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
109
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip)
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can
be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier
by skipping unnecessary memories.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.
The “Preset Skip” screen is displayed.
3nTo set the stations you want to skip by groups
AUse o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to
skip.
BPress u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press ENTER.
Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the
selected group “z-z”.
(z is the selected group number.)
nTo set the stations you want to skip by stations
AUse o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want
to skip.
BUse ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
CUse o p to select “Skip”.
The station you selected is not displayed.
4Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
110
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Cancelling Preset Skip
1While the “Preset Skip” screen is displayed, use o p to
select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel
the skip for.
2Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip
for.
3Use o p to select “On”.
The skip is cancelled.
NOTE
0“Preset Skip” cannot be cancelled for groups.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
111
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to Internet Radio
.
INTERNET
RADIO
OPTION
1
8 9
3
2
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
(HEOS Music)
0Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0The Internet Radio station list on this unit the database service provided
by TuneIn Radio service.
0The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows.
See “Playing back Internet Radio” (v p. 304) for details.
0WMA
0MP3
0MPEG-4 AAC
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
112
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to Internet Radio
1Press INTERNET RADIO.
0You can also press R (HEOS Music). Use ui to select “TuneIn
Internet Radio”, then press ENTER.
2Select the station you want to play.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3 zPause
2Stop
8 9 zSkip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in
the list display
HOME Go to Home screen
z Enabled when playing Podcasts.
0The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
NOTE
0The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Adding to HEOS Favorites” (v p. 133)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 135)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 136)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 137)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 139)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
113
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
.
OPTION
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
1
8 9
3
2
(HEOS Music)
0This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) from DLNA
compatible servers including PCs and NAS devices on your network.
0Supported file formats:
For details, see “Playing back a file saved on a PC or
NAS” (v p. 303).
0WMA
0MP3
0WAV
0MPEG-4 AAC
0FLAC
0Apple Lossless
0DSD
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
114
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back files stored on a PC or
NAS
Use this procedure to play music files or playlists stored on DLNA files
servers on your local network.
1Press R (HEOS Music).
2Use ui to select “Music Servers”, then press ENTER.
.
MUSIC
USB Music
Music Servers
HEOS Favorites
TuneIn Internet Radio
3Select the name of your networked PC or NAS
(Network Attached Storage) server.
4Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select
something to play.
0When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to
queue up your music.
Play Now:
Inserts the item into the queue after the
currently playing track and plays the
selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace
Queue:
Clears the queue and plays the
selected item immediately.
Play Next:
Inserts the item into the queue after the
current song and plays it when the
current song ends.
Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.
.
Live 01
Live 02
Live 03
Live 04
Various Artists
Various Artists
Various Artists
Various Artists
Live 05
Various Artists
Music Servers
-
Live 01
Play Now
Play Next
Add to End of Queue
Play Now & Replace Queue
Live
Cancel
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
115
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
5Use ui to select the “Play Now” or “Play Now &
Replace Queue”, then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
.
Live 01
-
Various Artists
NOW PLAYING
-2:212:45
Live
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in
the list display
HOME Go to Home screen
0The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album
art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files
can be displayed.
NOTE
0When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless
LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In
this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server
specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the
server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
116
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 135)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 136)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 137)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 139)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
117
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Getting the HEOS App
You can use many online music streaming services from the HEOS App. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose
from.
Download the HEOS App for iOS or Android by searching App Store, Google Play store or Amazon Appstore for “HEOS”.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
118
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
HEOS Account
HEOS Accounts can be registered in “HEOS Account” (v p. 247) in the
menu of this unit or by tapping “Music” tab - “Settings” icon a in the
HEOS App.
oWhat is a HEOS Account?
A HEOS Account is master account or “keychain” for managing all of
your HEOS music services with one single username and password.
oWhy do I need a HEOS Account?
With the HEOS Account you just have to enter your music services
login names and passwords one time. This allows you to easily and
quickly use multiple controller apps on different devices.
You just log into your HEOS Account on any device and you will have
access to all of your associated music services, play history and
custom playlists, even if you are at a friend’s house listening to music
on their HEOS system.
oSigning up for a HEOS Account
You will be instructed to signup for a HEOS Account the first time you
try to access any music service from the main “Music” menu of the
HEOS App.
oChanging your HEOS Account
1Tap the “Music” tab.
2Select the Settings icon a in the upper left corner of
the screen.
3Select “HEOS Account”.
4Change your location, change your password, delete
your account or sign out of your account.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
119
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing from streaming music services
A music service is an online music company that provides access to vast
music collections via free and/or paid subscriptions. Depending upon your
geographical location, there are several options to choose from.
oSelecting a room/device
1Tap the “Rooms” tab, and select “AV7705” if there are
multiple HEOS devices.
0Tap the Pencil icon e at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the
displayed name.
.
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Now PlayingMusic
Song Name 3
AV7705
Song Name 1
Dining L + Dining R
Song Name 2
Kitchen
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
120
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSelecting the music track or station from
music sources
1Tap the “Music” tab and select a music source.
0All music services displayed may not be available in your location.
.
Now PlayingMusicRooms
This Phone
Music
Music Servers USB Music
Playlists History
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
121
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
2Browse the music to play.
After selecting a music track or radio station the app will
automatically change to the “Now Playing” screen.
0When you select a music track to play you will be asked how you want to
queue up your music.
Play Now:
Inserts the item into the queue after the
currently playing track and plays the
selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace
Queue:
Clears the queue and plays the
selected item immediately.
Play Next:
Inserts the item into the queue after the
current song and plays it when the
current song ends.
Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.
0When you select a radio station the following items are displayed.
Play Now: Plays the selected item immediately.
Add to HEOS Favorites: Adds to HEOS Favorites.
.
Music
Rooms Now Playing
Album
Album
Play Now
Cancel
Play Now & Replace Queue
Play Next
Add to End of Queue
Track 01
Rooms
10 Tracks,60 Mins.,2014
Artist
MusicRooms Now Playing
Track 01
Album
0:50
-
2:51
Artist
Now Playing
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
122
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to the same music in multiple
rooms
The HEOS system is a true multi-room audio system that automatically
synchronizes audio playback between multiple HEOS devices so that the
audio coming from different rooms is perfectly in sync and always sounds
amazing! You can easily add up to 32 HEOS devices to your HEOS
system. You can join or group up to 16 individual HEOS devices into a
group of HEOS devices that function as if they were a single HEOS
device.
oGrouping rooms
1Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing
music.
2Drag it into the room that is playing music (indicated by
the red outline) and lift your finger.
3The two rooms will be grouped together into a single
device group and both rooms will be playing the same
music in perfect sync.
0When audio from the device connected to this unit is played back in a group, only
2-channel PCM input from the HDMI, digital or analog terminals can be played
back.
.
2
1
3
Now PlayingMusicRooms
Song Name 1
Dining
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Now PlayingMusicRooms
Song Name 3
Song Name 3
Song Name 2
Song Name 2
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Bedroom
Dining
Living
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Living
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
Living+Kitchen
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
123
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oUngrouping rooms
1Press and hold your finger on room that you want to
remove from the group.
2Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.
NOTE
0You can not remove the first room that started playing the music before grouping.
.
2
1
Song Name 3
Song Name 2
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Dining
Living
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Song Name 4
Song Name 3
Song Name 2
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Dining
Living
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Living
Now PlayingMusicRoomsNow PlayingMusicRooms
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
124
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oGrouping all rooms (party mode)
You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a
"pinch" gesture.
1Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms.
2Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release.
3All of your rooms will be joined together and begin
playing the same music in perfect sync.
.
1
2
3
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Dining
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Song Name 4
Song Name 3
Song Name 2
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Dining
Living
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Living
Now PlayingMusicRooms Now PlayingMusicRooms
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
Dining+Living+...
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
125
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oUngrouping all rooms
You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using
a "spread" gesture.
1Place two fingers close together on the screen over list
of rooms.
2Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other
and release.
3All of your rooms will be ungrouped.
.
1
23
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Dining
Dining
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Song Name 4
Song Name 3
Song Name 2
Song Name 1
Bedroom
Dining
Living
Kitchen
Drag one room into another to group them
Rooms
Living
Now PlayingMusicRooms
Now PlayingMusicRooms
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
126
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be
played on this unit via the network.
0Source input will be switched to “HEOS Music” when AirPlay playback is started.
0You can stop AirPlay playback by choosing other input source.
0To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
0For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
0The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
This unit supports AirPlay 2.
Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous
playback.
0This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.
.
PC Router
This unit
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
127
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod
touch or iPad
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can
stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.
1Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the
same network as this unit.
0For details, see your device’s manual.
2Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.
AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3Tap the AirPlay icon.
.
AirPlay
AirPlay
D
rop:
AirDrop:
ryone
ryone
[Example] iOS 10 [Example] iOS 9
4Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.
Playing iTunes music with this unit
1Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that
is connected to the same network as this unit.
2Turn this unit ON.
Set “Network Control” to “Always On” for this unit. (v p. 245)
NOTE
0When “Network Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more
standby power.
3Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon to select the
main unit.
.
[Example] iTunes
4Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
128
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
NOTE
0In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod
touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to
playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
Perform iTunes playback operations
with the remote control unit of this unit
With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,
pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
1Select the “Edit” - “Preferences...” in the iTunes menu.
2Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
3Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers”, and then click “OK”.
0This does not need to be set if using version 12 or later of iTunes.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
129
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod
touch or iPad on multiple synced
devices (AirPlay 2)
Songs from an iPhone, iPod touch or iPad operating iOS 11.4 or later can
be synced with multiple AirPlay 2 supported devices for simultaneous
playback.
1Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.
AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
.
2Tap the AirPlay icon.
Displays a list of devices/speakers that can be played back on the
same network.
0A circle is displayed to the right of AirPlay 2 compatible devices.
.
Speakers
Marantz xxxxxxxx
iPhone
3Tap the devices/speakers you want to use.
0Multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices can be selected.
0Volume can be adjusted for each device individually or for all
synced devices simultaneously.
.
iPhone
Speakers
Marantz xxxxxxxx
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
130
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Spotify Connect function
Spotify is the world’s most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to
Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or
tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or
use other apps - the music never stops.
For information on how to set up and use Spotify Connect please visit
www.spotify.com/connect
.
Spotify server
Control
This unit
Spotify App
Audio
streaming/
control
Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the “Spotify App” onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.
To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify
premium account first.
1Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device
in the same network as this unit.
2Launch the Spotify App.
3Play back the Spotify track.
4Tap the Spotify icon F to select the unit.
The music will stream to this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
131
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Convenience functions
.
OPTION
uio p
ENTER
(HEOS Music)
This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for
each input source.
These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
132
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adding to HEOS Favorites
1While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Add to HEOS Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
Playing back HEOS Favorites
1Press R (HEOS Music).
2Use ui to select “HEOS Favorites”, then press ENTER.
.
MUSIC
USB Music
Music Servers
HEOS Favorites
TuneIn Internet Radio
3Browse the content and select something to play.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
133
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Deleting a HEOS Favorites
1While the HEOS Favorites content list is displayed, use
ui to select the item you want to remove from HEOS
Favorites, then press OPTION.
2Use ui to select “Remove from HEOS Favorites”, then
press ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
134
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the volume of each channel
to match the input source (Channel
Level Adjust)
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You
can set this for each input source.
1Press OPTION.
An option menu screen is displayed.
0When the input source is “HEOS Music”, an option menu for
online music is displayed. Select “AVP Options…”, then press
ENTER.
2Use ui to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press
ENTER.
The “Channel Level Adjust” screen is displayed.
3Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.
4Use o p to adjust the volume.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
5Use uio p to select “Exit”, then press ENTER.
0Select “Reset” and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of
the various channels to “0.0 dB” (Default).
0Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
0“Channel Level Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”. (v p. 192)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
135
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the tone (Tone)
Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1Press OPTION.
An option menu screen is displayed.
0When the input source is “HEOS Music”, an option menu for
online music is displayed. Select “AVP Options…”, then press
ENTER.
2Use ui to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.
The “Tone” screen is displayed.
3Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.
On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
Off
(Default):Playback without tone adjustment.
4Select “On” in step 3 and press i to select the sound
range to be adjusted.
Bass: Adjust bass.
Treble: Adjust treble.
5Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.
-6 dB – +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)
0“Tone” settings are stored for each input source.
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 186)
0You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu “HDMI Audio Out”
is set to “TV”. (v p. 192)
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
136
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Displaying your desired video during
audio playback (Video Select)
This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio
playback. You can set this for each input source.
nSupported input sources:
CDz / Tuner / HEOS Music / Phono
zThis cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video
connectors are assigned.
1Press OPTION.
An option menu screen is displayed.
0When the input source is “HEOS Music”, an option menu for
online music is displayed. Select “AVP Options…”, then press
ENTER.
2Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.
The “Video Select” screen is displayed.
3Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
Off
(Default):Disable Video Select mode.
On: Enable Video Select mode.
4If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select
“Source”.
5Use o p to select the input source for video you want
to play back, then press ENTER.
0“Video Select” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
137
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the picture quality for your
viewing environment (Picture Mode)
nSupported input sources :
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 /
AUX2 / Media Player / CDz / TV Audioz
zYou can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video
connector is assigned.
1Press OPTION.
An option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.
The “Picture Mode” screen is displayed.
3Use o p to select the picture mode.
Off
(Default):
No picture quality adjustment is done
with this unit.
Standard: The standard mode suited for most
living room viewing environments.
Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a
dark room such as a theater room.
Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for
games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video
sources.
ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a
bright room during the day.
ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a
dark room at night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
4Press ENTER.
0“Picture Mode” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
138
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing the same music in all zones (All
Zone Stereo)
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE
simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms).
It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in
multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same
BGM in the entire house.
1Press OPTION.
An option menu screen is displayed.
0When the input source is “HEOS Music”, an option menu for
online music is displayed. Select “AVP Options…”, then press
ENTER.
2Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
The “All Zone Stereo” screen is displayed.
3Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
0The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the
same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the
All Zone Stereo mode.
0When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All
Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then
press “Start”.
oStopping the All Zone Stereo mode
1During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press
OPTION.
An option menu screen is displayed.
0When the input source is “HEOS Music”, an option menu for
online music is displayed. Select “AVP Options…”, then press
ENTER.
2Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
3Select “Stop”, then press ENTER.
0The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN
ZONE is turned off.
0In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the “Multi Ch Stereo” and “Stereo” sound modes
can be selected.
0When “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available.
(v p. 192)
0When “Input Mode” is set to other than “7.1CH IN”, the All Zone Stereo mode is
available. (v p. 209)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
139
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Selecting a sound mode
.
PURE
MOVIE
MUSIC GAME
ui
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo
playback modes.
Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by
digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from
internet-based subscription services.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than
multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
0For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
140
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Selecting a sound mode
1Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.
MOVIE : Switches to the sound mode suitable for
enjoying movies and TV programs.
MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for
enjoying music.
GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for
enjoying games.
0The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for
its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as
the one selected at the previous playback.
0If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,
the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
0This can also be set by pressing MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME on the main unit.
oSwitching the sound mode
0Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes
that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME,
the sound mode changes.
0While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound
mode.
0Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite
mode.
0Please set the surround mode to Dolby Atmos/Surround when playing back Dolby
Atmos encoded content. Dolby Atmos/Surround delivers the optimum playback
experience from Blu-ray and streaming sources encoded with Dolby Atmos as well
as channel based content. The default setting of this receiver is Dolby Atmos/
Surround.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
.
MOVIE SOUND
Stereo
DTS Neural:X
Auro-3D
Auro-2D Surround
Multi Ch Stereo
Dolby Audio - Dolby Surround
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
141
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1Press PURE to select “Direct”.
Direct playback begins.
0While DSD signals are played back, “DSD Direct” is displayed.
0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback
mode.
This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing
so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
1Press PURE to select “Pure Direct”.
The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
The PURE DIRECT indicator lights.
0In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0Tone (v p. 136)
0M-DAX (v p. 182)
0MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 185)
0Dynamic EQ (v p. 186)
0Dynamic Volume (v p. 187)
0Graphic EQ (v p. 188)
0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
NOTE
0Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct
mode.
0When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5
seconds.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
142
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically
selects the corresponding mode for playback.
Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input
signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the
respective channel number.
1Press PURE to select “Auto”.
Auto surround playback begins.
0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
143
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Description of sound mode types
Dolby sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Dolby AtmoszPlease select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Atmos. If you have selected a different sound mode
previously, please select again this mode for Dolby Atmos content play back. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its
positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of
the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Dolby TrueHD Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby TrueHD at 192kHz/96kHz.
Dolby Digital Plus Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital Plus.
Dolby Digital Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital.
zThis mode is not supported in a 5.1-channel or less speaker configuration.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
144
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
DTS sound mode
Sound mode type Description
DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES Dscrt6.1z1This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1z1This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software
recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,
surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
DTS:X This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X.
It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating
natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Neural:X This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.
Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Virtual:Xz2z3This mode uses DTS Virtual:X with virtual height and virtual surround processing to realize a three-dimensional sound field
when the height speakers are not used.
z1 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”. (v p. 229)
z2This can be selected when Height, Ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not being used.
z3It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
145
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Auro-3D sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Auro-3D This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create three-dimensional audio output using the Height Channel. It is ideal for
playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D with a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer
called the Auro-Matic is used to create highly realistic three-dimensional audio output.
Auro-2D Surround This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create Surround Sound without a Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals
encoded as Auro-3D without a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-
Matic is used to output Surround Sound.
PCM multi-channel sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.
Original sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)
speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
146
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Auto sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Auto In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX,
Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches
automatically to the corresponding mode.
If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played
back according to the respective channel number.
Stereo sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.
0Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.
0When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Direct sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.
Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.
The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.
0Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)
0The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
147
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.
0Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 177)
.
Stereo SSS
Dolby Surround z2SSS
DTS Neural:X z2SSS
DTS Virtual:X z3z4SSS
Auro-3D z5SSS
Auro-2D Surround z6SSS
Multi Ch Stereo z7SSS
Virtual SSS
2-channel z1
GAME button
MUSIC button
MOVIE button
Sound mode
Input signal
z12-channel also includes analog input.
z2This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1, 9.1 or 11.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is
front speakers only.
z3It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
z4It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
z5It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used.
z6It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
z7This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
148
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Stereo SSS
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital z7SSS
Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround z7SSS
Dolby Digital + Neural:X z7SSS
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus z7SSS
Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround z7z9SSS
Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X z7SSS
Dolby Atmos z7z10 SSS
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD z7SSS
Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround z7z9SSS
Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X z7SSS
Dolby Atmos z7z10 SSS
Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos z7SSS
DTS
DTS Surround z7SSS
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 z7SSS
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 z7SSS
DTS 96/24 z7SSS
DTS + Dolby Surround z7SSS
DTS + Neural:X z7SSS
DTS + Virtual:X z3SSS
Multi-channel z8
GAME button
MUSIC button
MOVIE button
Sound mode
Input signal
z3It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
z7This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
z8The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 310).
z9This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z10 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
149
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES z7SSS
DTS-HD MSTR z7SSS
DTS Express z7SSS
DTS-HD + Dolby Surround z7SSS
DTS-HD + Neural:X z7SSS
DTS-HD + Virtual:X z3SSS
DTS:X
DTS:X z7SSS
DTS:X MSTR z7SSS
DTS:X + Virtual:X z3SSS
Multi Ch In z7SSS
Multi Ch In 7.1 z7SSS
Multi In + Dolby Surround z7SSS
Multi Ch In + Neural:X z7SSS
Multi In + Virtual:X z3SSS
Auro-3D z5SSS
Auro-2D Surround z6SSS
Multi Ch Stereo z7SSS
Virtual SSS
Multi-channel z8
PCM multi-channel
GAME button
MUSIC button
MOVIE button
Sound modeInput signal
z3It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
z5It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height speakers is used.
z6It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
z7This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
z8The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 310).
0Only “Stereo” and “Virtual” can be selected when headphones are used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
150
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oViews on the display
.
DD+ DSur
Blu-ray
q w
AShows a decoder to be used.
0In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, “ ” is displayed.
BShows a decoder that creates sound output.
0“ ” indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
151
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
HDMI Control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with
another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure
1Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On”. (v p. 194)
2Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.
3Set the HDMI Control function for all devices connected
by HDMI cable.
0Please consult the operating instructions for the connected
devices to check the settings.
0Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected
to this unit.
5Switch the input source of this unit to check that video
from the player connected by HDMI is played back
correctly.
6When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that
the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE
0Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.
0The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI Control function.
0When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with “HDMI Control” in the menu set to
“On”, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
152
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Smart Menu function
This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an
input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV
remote control.
1Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit and the
TV. (v p. 194)
2Set “Smart Menu” to “On” on this unit. (v p. 196)
3Select “AV Receiver” in a TV menu such as “Input”z or
“Operate Connected HDMI Device”z.
The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV.
0This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the
Smart Menu is displayed.
zThe selection method differs depending on your TV.
.
Smart Menu
Smart Select 4
Help
Smart Select 3Smart Select 2Smart Select 1
Smart Menu
Setup MenuSound ModeSource
Now Playing
Blu-ray
oNow Playing
Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.
oSource
Switch the input of this unit.
If you select “HEOS Music” or “Tuner”, you can continue to operate this
unit using the TV remote control.
oSound Mode
Change the sound mode of this unit.
You can select from the following three sound modes.
Surround: Surround sound playback according to
the input signal.
Stereo: Stereo playback.
Multi Ch Stereo: Multi-channel stereo playback.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
153
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSetup Menu
Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.
oSmart Select
Calls up the “Smart Select” items registered to this unit.
NOTE
0If the “HDMI Control” or “Smart Menu” settings have been changed, always reset
the power to connected devices after the change.
0The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications
of your TV. In this case, set “Smart Menu” to “Off”. (v p. 196)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
154
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sleep timer function
.
SLEEP
Z2
Z3
MAIN
You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time
has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to
sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
155
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Using the sleep timer
1Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with
the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
0The sleep timer indicator lights up on the display and the sleep
timer starts.
0You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in
steps of 10 minutes.
oChecking the remaining time
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.
The remaining time appears on the display.
oTo cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select “Off”.
The sleep timer indicator on the display turns off.
0The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE
0The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this
unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the
connected devices themselves.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
156
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Smart select function
.
SMART
SELECT
1 – 4
Z2
Z3
MAIN
Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be
registered to the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the registered SMART SELECT buttons in
subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.
By saving frequently used settings at the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 buttons,
you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
The Smart Select function can be memorized for each zone.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
157
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Calling up the settings
1Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with
the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2Press SMART SELECT.
The Smart Select settings registered to the button you pressed are
called up.
0The default settings for the input source are as shown below.
GMAIN ZONEH / GZONE2H / GZONE3H
Button Input source
SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT
SMART SELECT 2 Blu-ray
SMART SELECT 3 Media Player
SMART SELECT 4 HEOS Music
0Volume is not registered to Smart Select in the factory default settings.
See “Changing the settings” to register volume to Smart Select.
(v p. 159)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
158
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Changing the settings
1Set the items below to the settings you want to
register.
The following settings from A to I can be memorized for MAIN
ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and
ZONE3.
AInput source (v p. 90)
BVolume (v p. 91)
CSound mode (v p. 140)
DAudyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFC™) (v p. 185)
E“ M-DAX ” (v p. 182)
F“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 135)
G“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 137)
H“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment
(Picture Mode)” (v p. 138)
I“ HDMI Video Output ” (v p. 197)
0Press and hold SMART SELECT while a radio station is being received is
being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio
station is memorized.
0Tuner / Internet Radio Station
2Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with
the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
3Press and hold the desired SMART SELECT until
“Smartz Memory”, “Z2 Smartz Memory” or “Z3
Smartz Memory” appears on the display.
The current settings will be memorized.
z is displayed the number for the SMART SELECT button you
pressed.
oChanging the Smart Select Name
The MAIN ZONE Smart Select name displayed on the TV screen or
display of this unit can be changed to a different name.
For the name change method, see “Smart Select
Names” (v p. 251).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
159
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of
the buttons on the front panel.
.
Xui ENTER
BACK
Disabling all key button operations
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use ui to select “FP/VOL LOCK On”.
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X are disabled.
Disabling all button operations except
VOLUME
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use ui to select “FP LOCK On”.
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
160
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Canceling the Panel lock function
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use ui to select “FP LOCK zOff”.
(z The currently set mode.)
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
The Panel lock function is canceled.
0Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the
remote control unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
161
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Remote lock function
When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When
the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote
control unit.
By default, this function is disabled.
.
Xui ENTER
BACK
Disabling the sensor function of the
remote control unit
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use ui to select “RC LOCK On”.
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
The infrared light receiving function is disabled.
Enabling the remote sensor function
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use ui to select “RC LOCK zOff”.
(z The currently set mode.)
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
162
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Switches light illumination on/off
.
DIMMER
Light illumination
You can switch the light illumination around the main display on or off.
The default setting is “On”.
1Press and hold DIMMER on the main unit for 3
seconds.
0Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings
again.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
163
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
.
PC Router
This unit
Tablet
0This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in
order to use the web control function. (v p. 84)
0Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able
to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the
security-related software.
Controlling the unit from a web control
1Switch the “Network Control” setting to “Always On”.
(v p. 245)
2Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”.
(v p. 240)
.
Network/Information
Friendly Name
DHCP
IP Address
MAC Address
Displays the current network settings of the AVP
Marantz AV7705
On
192.168.100.19
Connection Wired (Ethernet)
zzzzzz
-000000
Checking the IP address.
3Start up the web browser.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
164
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
4Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter
“http://192.168.100.19”.
.
http://192.168.100.19
File Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
5When the top menu is displayed on the web browser,
click on the menu item you want to operate.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
165
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).
You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN
ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Connecting ZONE
You can use the following two methods to play back video and audio in
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0“Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector” (v p. 166)
0“Connection through the video output connector and external power
amplifiers” (v p. 167)
oConnection 1 : Connection through the HDMI
ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can
play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 –
7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).
.
HDMI
ZONE2 HDMI
ZONE2
MAIN ZONE
0When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN
ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may
be mixed down to 2-channel audio.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
166
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oConnection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.
.
R
L
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
BPR
IN
AUX IN
AUX IN
Power amplifier
ZONE3
ZONE2
or
This unit
MAIN ZONE
Power amplifier
R
L
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
167
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2.
0If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set “HDMI Audio” to “PCM”. (v p. 248)
2-channel PCM signals are output from a device connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2.
In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on
the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.
0The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3.
0When “Component Video Out” in the menu is set to “ZONE2”, the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video. (v p. 201)
0The menu screen is not output in ZONE2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
168
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
.
VOLUME df
POWER X
Z2
Z3
MUTE :
Input source
select buttons
1Press Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the
remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The multi zone power indicator on the display lights.
0Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3Press the input source select button to select the input
source to be played.
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
0You can also select ZONE2 or ZONE3 as the input source by
pressing ZONE SELECT and then turning the INPUT
SELECTOR.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
169
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAdjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3)
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “70 (–10 dB)”.
(v p. 250)
0Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust the
volume.
oTurning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
(ZONE2/ZONE3)
Press MUTE :.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu.
(v p. 250)
0To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :
again.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
170
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Menu map
When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.
The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
Audio
Center Level Adjust Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources. 176
Subwoofer Level Adjust Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources. 176
Bass Sync Adjusts the phase shift when there is a delay in the bass (LFE) recorded on a disc. 177
Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters. 177
M-DAX Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as
MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.
182
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 183
Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting. 184
Audyssey Makes Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic
Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM settings.
185
Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 188
.
Video
Picture Adjust Adjusts picture quality. 190
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings. 192
Output Settings Makes settings for video output. 197
Component Video Out Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2. 201
On Screen Display Configures the on-screen display settings. 201
4K Signal Format Set the 4K signal format when the TV or playback device is 4K compatible. 202
TV Format Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. 204
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
171
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
Inputs
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 205
Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 207
Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 207
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 208
Input Select Sets the audio input mode. 209
.
Speakers
Audyssey® Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are
measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.
210
Manual Setup Sets up the speakers manually or changes Audyssey® Setup settings. 221
.
Network
Information Displays network information. 240
Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 240
Settings Used for manually setting the IP address. 243
Network Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. 245
Friendly Name The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change
the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
245
Diagnostics Used to check the network connection. 246
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
172
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
HEOS Account
【When the user is signed out the HEOS Account】
I have a HEOS Account Selects to sign in. 247
Create Account Creates new HEOS Account. 247
Forgot Password If you forgot your password, we'll send you an email with instructions about how to reset
it.
247
【When the user is signed in the HEOS Account】
Signed in As Displays your HEOS Account. 247
Change Location Selects your location. 247
Change Password Changes your HEOS Account Password. 247
Delete Account Deletes your HEOS Account. 247
Sign Out Sign out of your HEOS Account. 247
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
173
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
General
Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 248
ZONE2 Setup/
ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3. 248
Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 251
Smart Select Names Changes the Smart Select Name display title to one you prefer. 251
Trigger Out 1/
Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. 251
Auto Standby Configures the Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 252
Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit. 253
Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the
firmware, and sets up the notification message display.
254
Information Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. 257
Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Marantz. 258
Save & Load Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device. 259
Setup Lock Protects settings from inadvertent changes. 259
Reset Various settings are reset to the factory default values. 260
.
Setup Assistant
Begin Setup... Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the
guidance indicated on the TV screen.
Page 9 of
the separate
manual
“Quick Start
Guide”
Language Select Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.
Speaker Setup
Speaker Calibration
Network Setup
TV Audio Connection
Input Setup
Mobile Apps
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
174
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
uio p
ENTER SETUP
MAIN
BACK
Menu operations
1Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the
operating zone to the MAIN ZONE.
The MAIN button lights.
2Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated,
then press ENTER.
4Use o p to change to desired setting.
5Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0To return to the previous item, press BACK.
0Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
menu display disappears.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
175
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Center Level Adjust
Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.
oCenter
Adjusts the volume output from the center channel.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0This setting is also reflected in the center channel level in the “Speakers” -
“Levels” menu settings. (v p. 234)
Subwoofer Level Adjust
Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.
oSubwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2
Adjusts the volume level for the Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0This setting is also reflected in the subwoofer channel level in the “Speakers” -
“Levels” menu settings. (v p. 234)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
176
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Bass Sync
For contents recorded in multi-channel such as Blu-ray discs, the
recorded low frequency effects (LFE) may be out of synch and delayed.
This function corrects such a delay of low frequency effects (LFE).
0 ms – 16 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0How low frequency effects (LFE) are delayed differ according to the disc. Set this
to the desired value.
0“Bass Sync” settings are stored for each input source.
0This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your
preferences.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being
input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable
parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 307).
0Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings
during playback.
0“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
oCinema EQ
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce
possible harshness and improve clarity.
On: “Cinema EQ” is used.
Off
(Default):“Cinema EQ” is not used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
177
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oLoudness Management
This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression” or
output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio
recorded in the disc.
On
(Default):
Outputs are given based on enabling the
settings made in “Dynamic Compression”
and Dialogue normalization function.
Off:
“Dynamic Compression” settings and
Dialogue normalization are disabled, and
the signals on the disc are output as is.
0“Loudness Management” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.
oDynamic Compression
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
Auto: Automatic dynamic range compression
on/off control according to source.
Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.
Off: Dynamic range compression is always
off.
0“Dynamic Compression” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.
0The default setting is “Off”. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or
Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is “Auto”.
0“Auto” cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
178
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oDialog Control
Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these
can be heard more easily.
0 – 6 (Default : 0)
0This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control
function is input.
oLow Frequency Effects
Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
nWhen “Input Mode” is set other than to “7.1CH IN”
-10 dB – 0 dB (Default: 0 dB)
nWhen “Input Mode” is set to “7.1CH IN”
0 dB / +5 dB / +10 dB / +15 dB (Default: +10 dB)
0For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
values below.
0Dolby Digital sources: 0 dB
0DTS movie sources: 0 dB
0DTS music sources: -10 dB
oCenter Spread
Center Spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front
speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is
optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content.
On: Use “Center Spread”.
Off
(Default):Do not use “Center Spread”.
0You can set this when sound mode is “Dolby Surround”.
oDTS Neural:X
DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and
optimizes them for your speaker configuration.
On
(Default):Use “DTS Neural:X”.
Off: Do not use “DTS Neural:X”.
0You can set this when sound mode is “DTS:X” or “DTS:X MSTR”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
179
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAuro-Matic 3D Preset
Selects the Auro-Matic 3D Preset for fine tuning the Auro-3D
experience to specific audio material.
Small:
“Small” is ideal for pop and chamber
music or movies with a lot of dialog. (e.g.
comedy)
Medium
(Default):
“Medium” is best used on jazz music or
typical movies and TV shows.
Large:
“Large” is ideal for recordings that were
recorded in large spaces. (e.g. orchestral
recordings or action movies with big
explosions.)
Speech:
“Speech” is ideal for recordings which are
mostly dialog (e.g. news broadcast), and
that have virtually no inherent spatial
information.
0You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.
0This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a
Height channel.
oAuro-Matic 3D Strength
Changes the level of the up-mixed channels in relation to the original
input signal.
The value ranges from 1 (no up-mixing) to 16 (Maximum level,
providing maximum effect).
1 - 16 (Default:10)
0You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.
0This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a
Height channel.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
180
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSpeaker Select
Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.
Floor: Plays back without height speakers.
Floor & Height
(Default):Plays back with height speakers.
0This can be set when the sound mode is the original sound mode.
oSubwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
On
(Default):The subwoofer is used.
Off: The subwoofer is not used.
0You can set this when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Stereo” and in the menu
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 236)
oSet Defaults
The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
181
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
M-DAX
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio)
and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal
components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “M-DAX”
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the
sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.
It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded
tonal range.
oMode
High:
Optimized mode for compressed sources
with very weak highs (64 kbps and
under).
Medium:
Apply suitable bass and treble boost for
all compressed sources (96 kbps and
under).
Low: Optimized mode for compressed sources
with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Off: Do not use “M-DAX”.
0The M-DAX indicator lights.
0This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
0This item default setting for “HEOS Music” is “Low”. All others are set to “Off”.
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
0“M-DAX” settings are stored for each input source.
0This can also be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
182
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audio Delay
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
0Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” is set to “Auto” or
“Game”. (v p. 198)
0“Audio Delay” settings are stored for each input source.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
oAuto Lip Sync
Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for
delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync.
On
(Default):Correct automatically.
Off: Do not correct automatically.
0Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of
your TV even when “Auto Lip Sync” is set to “On”.
oAdjust
The timing mismatch between the picture and sound needs to be
corrected manually.
0 ms – 500 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by “Auto Lip Sync”.
0Adjust for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” is set to “Auto” or
“Game”. (v p. 198)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
183
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Volume
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
oScale
Set how volume is displayed.
0 - 98
(Default):Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB: Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB
to 18.0 dB.
0“Scale” settings are reflected in all the zones.
oLimit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (–20 dB) / 70 (–10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
Off (Default)
0The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “-79.5 dB - 18.0
dB”. (v p. 184)
oPower On Level
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last
(Default):
Use the memorized setting from the last
session.
Mute: Always use the muting on condition when
power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79 dB – 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
0The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “-79.5 dB - 18.0
dB”. (v p. 184)
oMute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
(Default):The sound is muted entirely.
–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
184
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audyssey®
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey
Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™. These can be selected after
Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see
“Explanation of terms” (v p. 313).
0“MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level Offset”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey LFC™” and “Containment Amount” settings are stored for each input
source.
0When the sound mode is in the “Direct” or “Pure Direct” mode, “MultEQ® XT32”,
“Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume” and “Audyssey LFC™” settings cannot be
configured.
0When the sound mode is in “DTS Virtual:X” or sound mode that have “+Virtual:X”
in the sound mode name, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume” and “Audyssey
LFC™” settings cannot be configured.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
oMultEQ® XT32
MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency
characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup
measurement results. Selection is done from three types of
compensation curves. We recommend the “Reference” setting.
Reference
(Default):
Selects the default calibrated setting with
a slight roll off at high frequencies, which
is optimized for movies.
L/R Bypass:
Selects the reference setting, but
bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left
and right speakers.
Flat:
Selects the calibrated setting which is
optimized for small rooms where your
listening position is closer to the
speakers.
Off: Do not use “MultEQ® XT32”.
0When using headphones, “MultEQ® XT32” is automatically set to “Off”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
185
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oDynamic EQ
Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is
decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On
(Default):Use “Dynamic EQ”.
Off: Do not use “Dynamic EQ”.
0When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone”
adjustment. (v p. 136)
0This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC EQ on the main unit.
oReference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It
makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround
envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film
content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets
from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.
0 dB (Film Reference)
(Default):Optimized for content such as movies.
5 dB :
Select this setting for content that has a
very wide dynamic range, such as
classical music.
10 dB :
Select this setting for jazz or other music
that has a wider dynamic range. This
setting should also be selected for TV
content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB
below film reference.
15 dB :
Select this setting for pop/rock music or
other program material that is mixed at
very high listening levels and has a
compressed dynamic range.
0Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On”. (v p. 186)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
186
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oDynamic Volume
Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,
movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud
passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred
volume setting.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
Heavy: Most adjustment to softest and loudest
sounds.
Medium: Medium adjustment to loudest and
softest sound.
Light: Least adjustment to loudest and softest
sounds.
Off
(Default):Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.
0If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey® Setup”, the setting is
automatically changed to “Medium”. (v p. 210)
0This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC VOLUME on the main unit.
oAudyssey LFC™
Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from
being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On: Use “Audyssey LFC™”.
Off
(Default):Do not use “Audyssey LFC™”.
oContainment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings
if you have close neighbors.
1 – 7 (Default : 4)
0This can be set when “Audyssey LFC™” in the menu is set to “On”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
187
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
0Speakers for which “Graphic EQ” can be set differ according to the sound mode.
0This can be set when “MultEQ® XT32” setting is “Off”. (v p. 185)
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones.
(v p. 188)
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
oGraphic EQ / Headphone EQ
Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.
On: Use the graphic equalizer.
Off
(Default):Do not use the graphic equalizer.
0“Headphone EQ” is set in the menu when headphones are used.
oSpeaker Selection
Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all
speakers.
All: Adjust all speaker tones together.
Left/Right
(Default):
Adjust the left and right speaker tones
together.
Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.
oAdjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band.
1. Select the speaker.
2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz /
16 kHz
3. Adjust the level.
–20.0 dB – +6.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when
63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
188
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oCurve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in Audyssey® Setup.
0“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
0“Curve Copy” cannot be used when using headphones.
oSet Defaults
The “Graphic EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
189
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Video
Make video-related settings.
Picture Adjust
Picture quality can be adjusted.
0This can be set when the “Video Conversion” setting is “On”. (v p. 198)
0This can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” is assigned for each input
source. (v p. 206)
0“Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Saturation”, “Noise Reduction” and “Enhancer” can be
set when “Picture Mode” is set to “Custom”. (v p. 190)
0“Picture Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0“Picture Adjust” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
oPicture Mode
Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and
your viewing environment.
Standard: The standard mode suited for most living
room viewing environments.
Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a
dark room such as a theater room.
Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for
games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video
sources.
ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a
bright room during the day.
ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a
dark room at night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
Off
(Default):
No picture quality adjustment is done with
this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
190
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0The two special adjustment modes, “ISF Day” and “ISF Night”, should be used
by a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation
conditions.
We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF-
certified technician.
0These settings can also be configured using “Picture Mode” in the option
menu. (v p. 190)
oContrast
Adjust picture contrast.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
oBrightness
Adjust picture brightness.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
oSaturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
oNoise Reduction
Reduce overall video noise.
Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)
oEnhancer
Emphasize picture sharpness.
0 – +12 (Default : 0)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
191
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI
Control settings.
NOTE
0When “HDMI Pass Through” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more
standby power. (“ HDMI Pass Through ” (v p. 192), “ HDMI
Control ” (v p. 194))
If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you
unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
oHDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output device.
AVP
(Default):
Play back through speakers connected to
power amp. (Audio is output from the
PRE OUT connector on this unit.)
TV: Play back through TV connected to the
unit.
0When the HDMI Control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio
setting. (v p. 152)
0When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, audio is
output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.
oHDMI Pass Through
Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in
standby power mode.
On:
Transmits the selected HDMI input
through this unit’s HDMI output when this
unit is in standby power mode.
Off
(Default):
No HDMI signals are transmitted through
this unit’s HDMI output in standby power
mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
192
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oPass Through Source
Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.
Last
(Default):
The most recently used input source will
go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT / DVD /
Blu-ray / Game /
AUX1 / AUX2 /
Media Player / CDz:
Pass through the selected input source.
z“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI
connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input
Assign” setting. (v p. 205)
0“Pass Through Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or
“HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On”. (“ HDMI Pass Through ” (v p. 192),
“ HDMI Control ” (v p. 194))
oRC Source Select
Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select
button on the remote control when this unit is on standby.
Power On + Source
(Default):
The power of this unit is turned on and
the input source changes.
Source Select Only:
The HDMI input source changes while
this unit is on standby. The power display
of this unit blinks when the input source
select button of the remote control is
pressed.
0“RC Source Select” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or “HDMI
Pass Through” is set to “On”. (“ HDMI Pass Through ” (v p. 192), “ HDMI
Control ” (v p. 194))
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
193
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oHDMI Control
You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and
compatible with HDMI Control.
On: Use HDMI Control function.
Off
(Default):Do not use HDMI Control function.
0If using the HDMI Control function, connect a TV compatible with HDMI control
to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
0Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check
the settings.
0Refer to “HDMI Control function” for more information about the HDMI Control
function. (v p. 152)
NOTE
0If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
oARC
On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, set whether
to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.
On: Use ARC function.
Off
(Default):Do not use ARC function.
0You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control.
0If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel)
and enable the HDMI Control function of the TV.
0When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, the “ARC” settings automatically switch
“On”. (v p. 194)
NOTE
0If the “ARC” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
0Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from
the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of “ARC” settings in the menu.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
194
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oTV Audio Switching
Sets automatic switching to the “TV Audio” input when a TV connected
via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to this unit.
On
(Default):
Select the “TV Audio” input automatically
when receiving a command from the TV.
Off:
Do not select the “TV Audio” input
automatically when receiving a command
from the TV.
0“TV Audio Switching” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
(v p. 194)
oPower Off Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
All
(Default):
If power to a connected TV is turned off
independently of the input source, power
to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video:
With an input source being selected that
is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or
“VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the
TV off, power to this unit is automatically
set to standby. (v p. 206)
Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.
0“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
(v p. 194)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
195
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oPower Saving
If “TV Speaker” is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is
automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption.
This function is activated in the following cases.
0When “TV Audio” is selected as the input source of this unit
0When playing content from a device connected by HDMI
On: Use Power Saving function.
Off
(Default):Do not use Power Saving function.
0“Power Saving” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. (v p. 194)
oSmart Menu
This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select
an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV
remote control.
On: Use Smart Menu function.
Off: Do not use Smart Menu function.
0“Smart Menu” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. (v p. 194)
NOTE
0If the “Smart Menu” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
0The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the
specifications of your TV. In this case, set “Smart Menu” to “Off”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
196
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Output Settings
Makes settings for video output.
0This can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” is assigned for each input
source. (v p. 206)
0“Resolution”, “Sharpness”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set
when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”. (“ Resolution ” (v p. 199),
“ Sharpness ” (v p. 199), “ Progressive Mode ” (v p. 200), “ Aspect
Ratio ” (v p. 200))
0“Output Settings” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
0“Video Conversion”, “i/p Scaler”, “Resolution”, “Sharpness”, “Progressive Mode”
and “Aspect Ratio” settings are stored for each input source. (“ Video
Conversion ” (v p. 198), “ i/p Scaler ” (v p. 198), “ Resolution ” (v p. 199),
“ Sharpness ” (v p. 199), “ Progressive Mode ” (v p. 200), “ Aspect
Ratio ” (v p. 200))
oHDMI Video Output
Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.
Auto(Dual)
(Default):
The presence of a TV connected to the
HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2
connector is detected automatically, and
that TV connection is used.
Monitor 1: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
1 connector is always used.
Monitor 2: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
2 connector is always used.
0If both the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors are
connected and “Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a
resolution that is compatible with both TVs. (v p. 199)
When the “Resolution” setting in the menu is not set to “Auto”, set the
resolution in “Video” - “HDMI Monitor 1” and “HDMI Monitor 2” to one that is
compatible with both TVs. (v p. 257)
0You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in “HDMI
Monitor 1” and “HDMI Monitor 2”. (v p. 257)
0When connecting multiple Dolby Vision TVs, the signal will only be optimal for
one TV. A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector has priority.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
197
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oVideo Mode
Configure the video processing method to match the type of video
content.
Auto
(Default):
Process video automatically based on
the HDMI content information.
Game:
Always process video for game content.
Minimize the video delay when the video
is delayed compared to the button
operations on the controller of the game
console.
Movie: Perform image processing that is suitable
for contents other than games.
0If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input
contents.
oVideo Conversion
The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with
the connected TV. (v p. 299)
On
(Default):The input video signal is converted.
Off: The input video signal is not converted.
oi/p Scaler
Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p Scaler processing.
i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the
value set in “Resolution”. (v p. 199)
Analog
(Default):
Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler
function for analog video signals.
Analog & HDMI: Use i/p Scaler function for analog and
HDMI video signal.
HDMI: Use i/p Scaler function for HDMI video
signals.
Off: Do not use i/p Scaler function.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
198
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oResolution
Set the output resolution. You can set “Resolution” separately for
HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.
Auto
(Default):
The resolution supported by the TV
connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT
connector is detected automatically and
the appropriate output resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i /
720p / 1080p /
1080p:24Hz /
4K / 4K (60/50) :
Set the output resolution.
0When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog
video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 198)
0When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in
24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the
resolution to “1080p”.
0It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a
resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
oSharpness
Enables the sharpness feature which enhances the edges of images
when up-scaling video to 4K.
On:
Enables the video enhancer sharpness
feature to provide image edge contouring
which is optimized for converting lower
resolution standard definition video to 4K.
Off
(Default):
Disables the video enhancer sharpness
feature.
0This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 198)
0We recommend using this sharpness feature only when your TV sharpness is
set to 0.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
199
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oProgressive Mode
Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video
signal.
Auto
(Default):
The video signal is automatically
detected and the appropriate mode is
set.
Video: Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film: Select mode suitable for video and 30-
frame film material playback.
0This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 198)
oAspect Ratio
Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
16:9
(Default):Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 :
Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars
on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except
for 480p/576p output)
0This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 198)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
200
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.
MAIN ZONE
(Default):
Assigns the component video output
connector to MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2: Assigns the component video output
connector to ZONE2.
On Screen Display
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
oVolume
Sets where to display the volume level.
Bottom
(Default):Display at the bottom.
Top: Display at the top.
Off: Turn display off.
0When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text
(closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.
oInfo
Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is
switched.
On
(Default):Turn display on.
Off: Turn display off.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
201
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oNow Playing
Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is
“HEOS Music” or “Tuner”.
Always On
(Default):Show display continuously.
Auto Off: Show display for 30 seconds after
operation.
4K Signal Format
Set the 4K signal format to be played back by this unit when the TV or
playback device connected to this unit is HDMI 4K (60Hz/50Hz) signal
compatible.
o4K Signal Format
Set the format of the 4K signal played back by this unit.
Standard
(Default):
Select if your TV and playback devices
support standard 4K 60p 4:2:0 8 bit video
signals.
Enhanced:
Select if your TV, playback devices, and
cables support high quality 4K 60p 4:4:4,
4:2:2 or 4K 60p 4:2:0 10 bit video signals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
202
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
GRelation between the “4K Signal Format” setting and supported
resolutionsH
Support
Resolution
Color
Space
Pixel
Depth
4K Signal Format
Enhanced Standard
(Default)
4K 24p, 4K
30p, 4K 25p
RGB /
YCbCr 4:4:4
8 bit P P
10,12 bit P–
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit P P
4K 60p, 4K 50p YCbCr 4:2:0 8 bit P P
10,12 bit P–
RGB /
YCbCr 4:4:4
8 bit P–
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit P–
0When setting this to “Enhanced”, we recommend using a “Premium High
Speed HDMI Cable” or “Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet” that
has an “HDMI Premium Certified Cable” label attached to the product
package.
0When this setting is “Enhanced”, configure the television or playback device
settings to match this setting.
0When this setting is “Enhanced”, video may not be output correctly depending
on the connected playback device or HDMI cable. In this case, change this
setting to “Standard”.
0“Custom” is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom
installers has configured the HDMI signal format for this unit.
0“4K Signal Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the
menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same
time for at least 3 seconds.
“zVideo Format <PAL>” appears on the display.
2. Use u or i on the main unit.
“4K Format:<Standard>” appears on the display.
3. Use the main unit's o or p and select the 4K Signal Format.
4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
203
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
oFormat
PAL
(Default):Select PAL output.
NTSC: Select NTSC output.
0“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same
time for at least 3 seconds.
“zVideo Format <PAL>” appears on the display.
2. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the video signal format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
NOTE
0When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
204
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the
audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the
input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a
connected device.
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio
input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input
connector and video input connector when connecting an input source
that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this
unit.
.
DIGITAL ANALOGHDMI VIDEO
Inputs/Input Assign
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
Game
Media Player
TV Audio
AUX1
AUX2
2
3
4
5
-
FRONT
6
1
2
3
4
-
-
FRONT
-
VIDEO1
COMP1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
COMP2
-
FRONT
COMP3
COAX1
COAX2
-
-
OPT2
OPT1
-
-
Changes HDMI input assignments
CD - 5 --
1
0By default, each item is set as follows.
Input source Input connector
HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG VIDEO
CBL/SAT 1 COAX1 1 VIDEO1
DVD 2 COAX2 2 COMP1
Blu-ray 3 – 3 VIDEO2
Game 4 – 4 VIDEO3
Media Player 5 OPT2 – COMP2
TV Audio – OPT1 – –
AUX1 FRONT – FRONT FRONT
AUX2 6 – – COMP3
CD – – 5 –
nTV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box:
To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign” - “DIGITAL”, you will also need to
select “Digital” in the “Input Mode”. (v p. 209)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
205
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oHDMI
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input
sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 /
FRONT:
Assign an HDMI input connector to the
selected input source.
– : Do not assign an HDMI input connector
to the selected input source.
0When “HDMI Control” or “ARC” is set to “On” in the menu, “HDMI” cannot be
assigned to “TV Audio”. (“ HDMI Control ” (v p. 194), “ ARC ” (v p. 194))
0The eARC function does not operate when “HDMI” is set as the “TV Audio”
input source.
oDIGITAL
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
COAX1 (Coaxial) /
COAX2 /
OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2:
Assign a digital audio input connector to
the selected input source.
– : Do not assign a digital audio input
connector to the selected input source.
oANALOG
Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / FRONT: Assign a analog audio input connector to
the selected input source.
– : Do not assign a analog audio input
connector to the selected input source.
oVIDEO
Set this to change the component video input connectors and
composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources.
COMP1 (Component
video) / COMP2 /
COMP3 / VIDEO1 /
VIDEO2 / VIDEO3 /
FRONT:
Assign the video input connector to the
selected input source.
– : Do not assign a video input connector to
the selected input source.
oSet Defaults
The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
206
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Source Rename
Change the display name for input source.
This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source
name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your
needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this
unit’s display and on the menu screen.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray /
Game / AUX1 / AUX2 /
Media Player / CD /
TV Audio / Phono:
Change the display name for input source.
Set Defaults: The “Source Rename” settings are returned
to the default settings.
0Up to 12 characters can be input.
Hide Sources
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Show
(Default):Use this source.
Hide: Do not use this source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
207
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s
audio input.
Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels
between the different sources.
oSource Level
nWhen the input source is set to “HEOS Music” or
“Tuner”
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oAnalog Inputs / Digital Inputs
nWhen the input source is set other than to “HEOS
Music” or “Tuner”
-12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
0The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“ANALOG” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 205)
0The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 205)
0“Source Level” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
208
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Input Select
Set the audio input mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input
source.
0“Input Select” settings are stored for each input source.
oInput Mode
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.
Auto
(Default):
Automatically detect input signal and
perform playback.
HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital: Play only signals from digital audio input.
Analog: Play only signals from analog audio input.
7.1CH IN: Only signals input from the 7.1CH IN
connector will be played back.
0When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.
If the ~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” and the connections.
(v p. 205)
0If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV Audio” is fixed to ARC.
0When an eARC function-compatible television is connected to the HDMI
MONITOR 1 connector, the input mode is fixed to eARC while the input
source is “TV Audio”.
0The sound mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
209
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called
“Audyssey® Setup”.
You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed “Speaker Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.
To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” on the menu. (v p. 221)
Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we
recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the
illustration (up to eight positions).
When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound
calibration microphone within 60 cm of the first measurement position
(main listening position).
0If you perform Audyssey® Setup, Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ functions are enabled.
(v p. 185)
.
FL SW C FR
SRSL
Surround speaker (R)
Surround speaker (L)
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Front speaker (R)
Front speaker (L)
( :Measuring positions)
FL
FR
C
SW
SL
SR
Listening position
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
210
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAbout the main listening position
The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound
calibration microphone in the main listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover
value for the subwoofer.
oAbout Audyssey Sub EQ HT™
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers
seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences
between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ®
XT32 to both subwoofers together.
To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select “Measure (2 spkrs)” in
“Channel Select”. (v p. 213).
NOTE
0Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices
(radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be
affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.
Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the
Sound calibration microphone at least 50 cm away from the wall. Failure to do so
will result in inaccurate readings.
0During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers
and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise
in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or VOLUME on the main unit
during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the
headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
211
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Procedure for speaker settings
(Audyssey® Setup)
.
Finish
Check
Calculation & Store
Measurement
Preparation
1Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the
supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it
at the main listening position.
When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of
the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the
height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
2If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
nWhen using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.
nWhen using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
0Volume : 12 o’clock position
0Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
0Low pass filter : Off
0Standby mode : Off
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
212
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
3Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
.
When the Sound calibration microphone is
connected, the following screen is displayed.
.
Audyssey Setup
Dolby Speaker Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Start
Your AV preamp can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.
4Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings.
0Amp Assign
The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, HEIGHT1 and
HEIGHT2 PRE OUT connectors can be switched in accordance
with your speaker environment. (“ Amp Assign ” (v p. 221))
0Channel Select
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance,
measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring
time can be reduced. You can also change the number of
surround back speakers and subwoofer.
0Dolby Speaker Setup
Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and
the ceiling.
This can be set when using the Front Dolby Atmos Enabled,
Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled or Back Dolby Atmos Enabled
speaker.
5Follow the instructions on the screen display and press
“Next” to proceed further.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
213
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
6When the following screen is displayed, select “Begin
Test” and then press ENTER.
Start the measurement of the first position.
.
Begin Test
Back
Select “Begin Test” to start the calibration.
NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping
during the tests.
Audyssey Setup
Ear Height
0Measurement requires several minutes.
NOTE
0If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
0Go to “Error messages” (v p. 218). Check any related items, and
perform the necessary procedures.
0If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message
is displayed. See “Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust”
(v p. 219).
7When the detected speaker is displayed, select “Next”
and then press ENTER.
.
Audyssey Setup
Repeat Last Test Next
Speaker Detection
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
Surr. Back
:Yes
:Yes
:1spkr
:Yes
:No
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
214
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
8Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2,
select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position starts.
Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
.
Continue
Place the microphone ear level of the listener seated at the 2nd
listening position, which should be no more than 60 cm away
from the 1st position, then select “Continue”...
Audyssey Setup
Back
Ear Height
nStopping Audyssey® Setup
APress BACK to display the popup screen.
BPress o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
9Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.
0To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press o to
select “Complete” and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.
10
Select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
.
Audyssey Setup
Continue
Repeat Last Test
Measurements complete.
Select “Continue” to analyze the data...
Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
0Analysis takes several minutes to complete.
The more speakers and measurement positions that there are,
the more time it takes to perform the analysis.
NOTE
0When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is
not turned off.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
215
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
11
Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®.
The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the
settings as preferred.
.
Audyssey Setup
Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround
sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies
and television.
Turn on Dynamic EQ?
Yes
No
Analyzing room data
50%
0Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of
the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so
that sound can be heard even at low volume.
This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned
down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of
the night.
0Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level
while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.
12
When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound
calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the
main unit and then press “Next”.
.
Audyssey Setup
Now Analyzing and correcting your room data.
Please disconnect the microphone from your AV preamp.
Next
Back
Applying room corrections
100%
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
216
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
13
Select “Details” and press ENTER to verify the
measurement results.
0Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the
actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
NOTE
0Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey®
Setup. If these are changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the
optimum equalizer settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
217
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error
message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
No speakers found. 0Sound calibration microphone is not
detected.
0Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
0Not all speakers could be detected. 0Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too
low
0There is too much noise in the room. 0Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
0Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
0Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low. 0Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the
speakers are facing.
0Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Front R : None 0The displayed speaker could not be
detected.
0Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : Phase 0The displayed speaker is connected with the
polarity reversed.
0Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0For some speakers, this error message may be displayed
even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the
connection is correct, press p to select “Ignore”, then press
ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
218
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSubwoofer level error message and how to
adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup
measurement is 75 dB.
During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed
when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 – 78 dB range.
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the
subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range.
G Error message H
.
Audyssey Setup
Back SW Level MatchingSkip
Your Subwoofer 1’s level is too high.
If your subwoofer has a volume control on it,
select “SW Level Matching” to interactively adjust the level of
your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select “Skip”.
1Select “SW Level Matching” and then press ENTER.
2Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range, select “Next” and then press ENTER.
0If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer’s adjustment
will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
219
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey® Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even
when you have changed each setting manually.
.
Audyssey Setup
Dolby Speaker Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV preamp can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
220
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings
made in Audyssey® Setup.
0If you add or remove a speaker after performing Audyssey® Setup, you
will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 185)
0“Manual Setup” can be used without changing the settings. Please set if
necessary.
Amp Assign
You can change the Pre Amplifier assignment according to your speaker
system.
oAssign Mode
Select how to use the Pre Amplifier.
You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker
configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign
Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.
11.1ch
(Default):
0All Pre Amplifiers of this unit are used
for MAIN ZONE.
9.1ch (Bi-Amp):
0The Pre Amplifier of this unit is
assigned to 2-channels for creating bi-
amp connections with the front
speaker.
0You can connect speakers for up to
9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.
9.1ch + Front B:
0The Pre Amplifier of this unit is
assigned to 2-channels for connecting
to the second front speaker.
0You can connect speakers for up to
9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
221
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oPre-out for Bi-Amp / Pre-out for Front B
When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch (Bi-Amp)” or “9.1ch + Front B” in
the menu, select the PRE OUT connectors used for bi-amp or second
pair front speakers.
HEIGHT 2
(Default)：
The assigned channels are output from
the HEIGHT2 PRE OUT connectors. Up
to one pair of height, ceiling, and Dolby
Atmos Enabled channels can be used.
SURROUND BACK:
The assigned channels are output from
the SURROUND BACK PRE OUT
connectors. The surround back channel
cannot be used.
oFloor
nLayout
Select the floor speakers location.
5ch & SB
(Default):
This layout combines a surround back
speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.
5ch：
This is a basic 5-channel layout that uses
front speakers, center speakers and
surround speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
222
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oHeight
nHeight Sp
Select the number of the height speakers and ceiling speakers used in
MAIN ZONE.
None: Uses no height and ceiling speakers.
2ch: Uses a set of (two) height speakers or
ceiling speakers.
4ch
(Default):
Uses two sets of (four) height speakers or
ceiling speakers.
5ch: Uses five height speakers z
zIf “5ch” is selected, connect the Top Surround speaker to the SUBWOOFER 2
connector.
nDolby Sp
Select the number of the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers used in MAIN
ZONE.
None
(Default):Uses no Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
2ch: Uses a set of (two) Dolby Atmos Enabled
speakers.
4ch: Uses two sets of (four) Dolby Atmos
Enabled speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
223
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nLayout
Select the height, ceiling, or Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker location.
The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of “Assign Mode” and “Floor” - “Layout” in the menu. (“ Assign
Mode ” (v p. 221), “Floor” - “ Layout ” (v p. 222))
Settings AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2
None None - - -
2ch None
Front Height Front Height -
Top Front Top Front -
Top Middle Top Middle -
Top Rear Top Rear -
Rear Height Rear Height -
4ch None
z
1
Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height
z
2Front Height Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surr. Height
Top Front & Top Rear (Default) Top Front Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height
None 2ch
Front Dolby Front Dolby -
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby -
Back Dolby
z
3Back Dolby -
z1This can be selected when “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch”, when “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch (Bi-Amp)” and “Pre-out for Bi-Amp” is set to “SURROUND BACK” or
when “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch + Front B” and “Pre-out for Front B” is set to “SURROUND BACK” in the menu.
z2For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup
in place of Surround Height speakers.
z3This can be selected when “Floor” - “Layout” is set to “5ch & SB” in the menu.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
224
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Settings AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2
2ch 2ch
z
1
Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Front Height & Back Dolby
z
4Front Height Back Dolby
Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby
Top Front & Back Dolby
z
4Top Front Back Dolby
None 4ch
z
1Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Front Dolby & Back Dolby
z
4Front Dolby Back Dolby
z1This can be selected when “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch”, when “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch (Bi-Amp)” and “Pre-out for Bi-Amp” is set to “SURROUND BACK” or
when “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch + Front B” and “Pre-out for Front B” is set to “SURROUND BACK” in the menu.
z4This can be selected when “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch” and “Floor” - “Layout” is set to “5ch & SB” in the menu.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
225
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Settings AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Layout HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 SUBWOOFER2
5ch None
z
5Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surround Height Top Surround
Front Height & Rear Height
z
2Front Height Rear Height Top Surround
z2For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup
in place of Surround Height speakers.
z5This can be selected when “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch” in the menu.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
226
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oView Terminal Config.
This shows how to connect the PRE OUT connectors for your “Amp
Assign” setting on the menu screen.
Speaker Config.
Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low
bass frequencies and speaker size.
0When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in “Amp Assign” are set to “None”,
“None” is automatically set for Height2.
oFront
Set the front speaker size.
Large
(Default):
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
0When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.
0When “Front” is set to “Small”, you cannot set speakers other than “Front” to
“Large”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
227
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oCenter
Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when a center speaker is not
connected.
oSubwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
2 spkrs: Use two subwoofers.
1 spkr
(Default):Use only one subwoofer.
None: Select when a subwoofer is not
connected.
0When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” and you set “Front” to “Small”, “Subwoofer”
is automatically set to “1 spkr”.
oSurround
Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround speakers are
not connected.
0When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr. Back”, “Surround Dolby” and “Back
Dolby” are automatically set to “None”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
228
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSurr. Back
Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround back speakers
are not connected.
2 spkrs
(Default):Use two surround back speakers.
1 spkr:
Use only one surround back speaker.
Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND
BACK when this setting is selected.
0When “Surr. Back” is set to “None” or “1 spkr”, “Back Dolby” is automatically
set to “None”.
oFront Height
Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the front height speakers are
not connected.
oFront Dolby
Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the front Dolby speakers are
not connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
229
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oTop Front
Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top front speakers are
not connected.
oTop Middle
Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top middle speakers are
not connected.
oSurround Dolby
Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround Dolby
speakers are not connected.
oTop Rear
Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top rear speakers are
not connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
230
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSurr. Height
Set the presence and size of the surround height speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround height
speakers are not connected.
0When “Front Height” is set to “None”, “Surr. Height” is automatically set to
“None”.
oRear Height
Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the rear height speakers are
not connected.
oBack Dolby
Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the back Dolby speakers are
not connected.
0When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in “Amp Assign” are set to
“None”, “None” is automatically set for Height2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
231
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oTop Surround
Set the presence and size of the top surround speaker.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top surround speaker is
not connected.
0When “Surr. Height” or “Rear Height” is set to “None”, “Top Surround” is
automatically set to “None”.
Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each
speaker.
oUnit
Set the unit of distance.
Meters (Default)
Feet
oStep
Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
0.1 m / 0.01 m (Default: 0.1 m)
1 ft / 0.1 ft
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
232
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSet the distance
0.00 m – 18.00 m / 0.0 ft – 60.0 ft
0The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” and
“Speaker Config.” settings. (“ Amp Assign ” (v p. 221), “ Speaker
Config. ” (v p. 227))
0Default settings:
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Center / Front Dolby L / Front
Dolby R / Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 3.60 m (12.0 ft)
Speakers other than the above: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
0Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m
(20.0 ft).
oDolby Speaker Setup
Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the
ceiling.
0.90 m - 3.30 m / 3.0 ft - 11.0 ft
(Default : 1.80 m / 6.0 ft)
0This can be set when “Front Dolby”, “Surround Dolby” or “Back Dolby” is set to
“Large” or “Small” in “Speaker Config.”.
oSet Defaults
The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
233
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position
when it is output from each speaker.
oTest Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker.
While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the
selected speaker.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
0The set “Levels” are reflected in all sound modes.
0If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in “Channel Level Adjust”. (v p. 135)
0When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set “Levels”.
oSet Defaults
The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
234
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Crossovers
Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies
that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual
for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
oSpeaker Selection
Selects how to set the crossover frequency.
All
(Default):
Sets the same crossover frequency for all
speakers.
Individual: Selects the crossover points for each
speaker individually.
oSet the crossover frequency
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)
0“Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” setting is “LFE+Main”, or
when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. (v p. 236)
0The default crossover frequency is “80 Hz”, which will work best with the
widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that
the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to
“250 Hz” when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
0Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the
speakers set in “Small”. This cut off bass frequency is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
0The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ depending on
to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting. (v p. 236)
0When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be
set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed and the
setting cannot be made. (v p. 227)
0When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the
“Speaker Config.” setting. (v p. 227)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
235
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Bass
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
oSubwoofer Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):
The low range signal of the channel set to
“Small” speaker size is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:
The low range signal of all channels is
added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
0“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the
menu is set to other than “None”. (v p. 228)
0Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0If “Speaker Config.” - “Front” and “Center” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer
Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers,
depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (v p. 227)
Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from
the subwoofer.
oLPF for LFE
Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the
playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz
(Default: 120 Hz)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
236
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Front Speaker
Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.
A
(Default):Front speaker A is used.
B : Front speaker B is used.
A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
0This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch + Front B”. (v p. 221)
2ch Playback
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
oSetting
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
Auto
(Default):
The settings in “Speakers” are applied.
(v p. 210)
Manual: Set the speakers for 2-channel playback.
Make the following settings:
oFront
Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.
Large
(Default):
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
0When “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, “Large” is
automatically set. (v p. 228)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
237
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSubwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
Yes
(Default):Use a subwoofer.
No: Select when a subwoofer is not
connected.
0When “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, No is
automatically set. (v p. 228)
If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the setting is automatically “Yes”.
oSW Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):
When “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to
“Large”, only LFE signals are output from
the subwoofer. Also, when “2ch
Playback” - “Front” is set to “Small”, the
front channel low range signals are
added to the LFE signals and output from
the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:
The front channel low range signal is
added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
0This can be set when “2ch Playback” - “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
238
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oCrossover
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each
channel to the subwoofer.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)
0This can be set when “2ch Playback” - “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
0When “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Large” and “SW Mode” is set to “LFE”,
“Full Band” is displayed and this cannot be set.
oDistance FL / Distance FR
Set distance from main listening position to speaker.
0.00 m – 18.00 m (Default : 3.60 m) /
0.0 ft – 60.0 ft (Default : 12.0 ft)
0Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m
(20.0 ft).
oLevel FL / Level FR
Adjust the level of each channel.
-12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
239
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On”. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the “IP Address” settings, and enter
information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.
Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address /
MAC Address (Ethernet) / MAC Address (Wi-Fi) /
Wi-Fi signal strength
Connection
Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a
wired LAN.
When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select “Wired
(Ethernet)” after connecting a LAN cable.
When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select “Wireless (Wi-
Fi)” and configure the “Wi-Fi Setup”. (v p. 241)
oConnect Using
Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).
Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
(Default):
Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to
connect to a network.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
240
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Wi-Fi Setup
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.
The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection
method to suit your home environment.
oScan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible
networks shown on the TV screen.
1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks.
Select “Rescan” if the network cannot be found.
2. Enter your password and select “OK”.
oUse iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By
connecting your iOS device to this unit using Wi-Fi, the unit can be
automatically connected to the same network as your device.
1. Select “Use iOS Device” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN (Wi-
Fi) router and select “Marantz AV7705” from “SET UP NEW
AIRPLAY SPEAKER...” at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration
screen of your iOS device.
3. Tap “Next” on the screen of the iOS device.
0The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
241
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oWPS Router
Use a WPS-compatible router to connect using the push button
method.
1. Select “Push Button” on the TV screen.
2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the router
you wish to connect to.
0The time for pressing the button varies depending on the router.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen within 2 minutes.
oManual
Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to
connect to.
1. Set the following items.
SSID: Input the name of the wireless network
(SSID).
Security:
Select the encryption method according
to the encryption setting of the access
point you are using.
Password: Input the password.
2. Select “Connect” at the end of the setting.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
242
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or
tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
1. Press and hold the DIMMER and ZONE SELECT buttons on the main unit for at
least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to “Marantz AV7705” when
the message “Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called “Marantz
AV7705”” appears in the display.
3. Start up the browser and enter “192.168.1.16/Settings/” in the URL.
4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select “Connect” and then exit the
settings.
0The Default key of this unit is fixed at “1”. Set Default key of the router to “1” to use.
Settings
Configure the IP address.
0If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be
automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to “On” in the
default settings of this unit.
0Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server
information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting
to a network without DHCP function.
.
DHCP
-IP Address
-Subnet Mask
Save
Cancel
-Default Gateway
-DNS
Configures the network settings automatically or manually
Off
Network/Settings
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
243
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oDHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
On
(Default):
Configure the network settings
automatically from your router.
Off: Configure the network settings manually.
oIP Address
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
0The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254
CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254
CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254
oSubnet Mask
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to
this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider. Normally input “255.255.255.0”.
oDefault Gateway
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
oDNS
Enter the DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by
your provider.
0If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings.
(v p. 84)
0If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
244
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Network Control
Enables network communication in standby power mode.
Off In Standby
(Default):Suspend network function during standby.
Always On:
Network is on during standby. Main unit
operable with a network compatible
controller.
0When using the web control function, Marantz 2016 AVR Remote App or HEOS
App, use with the “Network Control” setting set to “Always On”.
NOTE
0When “Network Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby
power.
Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You
can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
oFriendly Name
Selects Friendly Name from the list.
When you select “Other”, you can change the Friendly Name
according to your preferences.
Home Theater /Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room /
Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den /
Office / Other
0Up to 30 characters can be input.
0The default Friendly Name on first use is “Marantz AV7705”.
oSet Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
245
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Diagnostics
Used to check the network connection.
oPhysical Connection
Checks the physical LAN port connection.
OK
Error: The LAN cable is not connected. Check
the connection.
0When connected using a wireless LAN, “Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)” will
be displayed.
oRouter Access
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.
OK
Error: Failed to communicate with the router.
Check the router settings.
oInternet Access
Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
OK
Error:
Failed to connect to the Internet. Check
the Internet connection environment or
router settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
246
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
HEOS Account
Make HEOS Account-related settings.
HEOS Account is needed in order to use HEOS Favorites.
The menu displayed differs depending on the status of the HEOS Account.
You have not signed in
oI have a HEOS Account
If you already have a HEOS Account, enter the current account name
and password to sign in.
oCreate Account
If you do not have a HEOS Account, create a new HEOS Account.
oForgot Password
If you have forgotten the password, an email explaining how to reset
the password will be sent.
You have already signed in
oSigned in As
The currently signed in HEOS Account is displayed.
oChange Location
Change the regional settings for the signed in HEOS Account.
oChange Password
Change the password for the signed in HEOS Account.
oDelete Account
Delete the signed in HEOS Account.
oSign Out
Sign out from the HEOS Account.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
247
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
General
Make various other settings.
Language
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
English / Deutsch / Français / Italiano / Español / Nederlands /
Svenska / Pусский / Polski (Default : English)
0“Language” can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu
screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same time
for at least 3 seconds.
“zVideo Format <PAL>” appears on the display.
2. Use u or i on the main unit twice.
“zGUI Language <ENGLISH>” appears on the display.
3. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the language.
4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0Values set for “Volume Limit” and “Power On Volume” are displayed according to
the setting specified for the volume “Scale”. (v p. 184)
oBass
Adjust bass.
-10dB – +10dB (Default : 0dB)
oTreble
Adjust treble.
-10dB – +10dB (Default : 0dB)
oHigh Pass Filter
Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
On: The low range is attenuated.
Off
(Default):The low range is not attenuated.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
248
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oLch Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oRch Level
Adjust the right channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oChannel
Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.
Stereo
(Default):Stereo playback.
Mono: Monaural playback.
oHDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)
Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.
Through
(Default):
The HDMI audio signal is passed through
this unit to the device in ZONE2.
PCM:
The HDMI audio signal input into this unit
is converted to a PCM signal that can be
output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT
connectors.
oVolume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable
(Default):Volume can be adjusted.
1 – 98
(–79 dB – 18 dB):
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The
volume cannot be adjusting using the
remote control unit.
0The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB”.
(v p. 184)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
249
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oVolume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
(Default : 70 (-10 dB))
Off: Do not set a maximum volume.
0This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 249)
0The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB”.
(v p. 184)
oPower On Volume
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last
(Default):
Use the memorized setting from the last
session.
Mute: Always mute when power is turned on.
1 – 98
(–79 dB – 18 dB): The volume is adjusted to the set level.
0This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 249)
0The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB”.
(v p. 184)
oMute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
(Default):The sound is muted entirely.
-40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
-20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
250
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited
zone name.
0Up to 10 characters can be input.
Smart Select Names
Change the smart select name that appears on the TV screen to one you
prefer.
Smart Select 1 / Smart Select 2 / Smart Select 3 / Smart Select 4
Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited
smart select name.
0Up to 16 characters can be input.
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out.
For details about how to connect the DC OUT jacks, see “DC OUT
jacks” (v p. 87).
nWhen setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 /
ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to
“On”.
nWhen setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.
nWhen setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.
On: Activate trigger on this mode.
– – –: Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
251
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Auto Standby
Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.
oMAIN ZONE
Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or
video signals input into this unit.
Before the unit enters standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on
the unit display and the menu screen.
60 min:
The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
30 min:
The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
15 min
(Default):
The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.
Off: The unit does not go into standby
automatically.
oZONE2 / ZONE3
When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here,
the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.
8 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby
state after about 8 hours.
4 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 4 hours.
2 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 2 hours.
Off
(Default):
Does not automatically switch ZONE2/
ZONE3 to the standby state.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
252
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Front Display
Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
oDimmer
Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
Bright
(Default):Normal display brightness.
Dim: Reduced display brightness.
Dark: Very low display brightness.
Off: Turns the display off.
0You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.
oChannel Indicators
Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for
the channel indication on the display.
Input: Uses the input signal display for the
channel indication on the display.
Output
(Default):
Uses the output signal display for the
channel indication on the display.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
253
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Firmware
Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades,
updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for
upgrades.
oCheck for Update
Check for firmware updates.
The firmware can be updated if a firmware update has been released.
Update Now:
Execute the update process. When the
update starts, the menu screen is shut
down. During the update, the progress is
shown on the display.
Update Later: Update later.
0This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still
cannot be performed, an “Update Error” message appears in the display. See
“Troubleshooting” – “Update/upgrade error messages” for information on
update error messages. (v p. 293)
Check the conditions according to the message and try the update again.
0This menu cannot be selected when “Allow Update” is set to “Off”.
oAuto-Update
Turns on Automatic Updates so that futures updates are automatically
downloaded and installed when this unit is in standby mode.
nAuto-Update
This unit will automatically update to the newest firmware when in
standby mode.
On: Turns on Automatic Updates.
Off
(Default):Turns off Automatic Updates.
nTime Zone
Change the time zone.
Set the time zone that matches the area where you live.
0This menu cannot be selected when “Allow Update” is set to “Off”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
254
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAllow Update
Enable or disable updates and upgrades for this unit.
On
(Default):
Enables this unit to receive updates and
upgrades.
Off: Prevents this unit from receiving update
and upgrade.
0This setting causes Incompatibilities between this unit and HEOS App.
oUpgrade Notification
When the latest Upgrade firmware is available, a notification message
is displayed on the TV screen at power on.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the
power is turned on.
On
(Default):Display upgrade message.
Off: Do not display upgrade message.
0This menu cannot be selected when “Allow Update” is set to “Off”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
255
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAdd New Feature
Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform
an upgrade.
Upgrade Package: Display the items to be upgraded.
Upgrade Status: Display a list of the additional functions
provided by the upgrade.
Upgrade:
Execute the upgrade process.
When the upgrade starts, the menu
screen is shut down. During the upgrade,
the amount of upgrade time which has
elapsed is displayed.
0Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be
announced on the Marantz website each time related plans are defined. See
the Marantz website for details about upgrades.
0When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and
upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not
Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s
o and SETUP for at least 3 seconds.
0If the upgrade is not successful, “Upgrade Error” message appears in the
display. See “Troubleshooting” – “Update/upgrade error messages” for
information on upgrade error messages. (v p. 293)
Check the settings and network environment and then perform the upgrade
again.
0This menu cannot be selected when “Allow Update” is set to “Off”.
Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”
0In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system
requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 84)
0Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
0Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure
to be completed.
0Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot
be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore,
there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,
etc., set on this unit.
0If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for
more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. After
about 1 minute, “Please wait” appears on the display and update
restarts. If the error continues, check the network environment.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
256
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Information
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
oAudio
Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.
Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.
Input Signal: The input signal type.
Format: The number of input signal channels
(presence of front, surround, LFE).
Sample Rate: The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Offset: The dialogue normalization correction
value.
Flag:
This is displayed when inputting signals
including a surround back channel.
“MATRIX” is displayed with DTS-ES
Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with
DTS-ES Discrete signals.
oVideo
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for
MAIN ZONE.
HDMI Signal Info.
Resolution / HDR / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2
Interface / HDR / Resolutions
oZONE
Show information about current settings.
MAIN ZONE:
This item shows information about
settings for MAIN ZONE. The information
displayed differs according to the input
source.
ZONE2/3: This item shows information about
settings for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
oFirmware
Version: Displays information for the current
firmware.
DTS Version: Displays the current DTS version.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
257
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oNotifications
Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is
turned on.
Notification Alerts
On
(Default):Notification messages are displayed.
Off: Notification messages are not displayed.
0Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume,
sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.
.
AUDYSSEY
SIGNAL
EXTLFE
SB SBRSBL
CFR
FHR SW
FL
FHL
SRSL
SBRSBL
CFRFL
SRSL
INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS
SOUND
SOURCE
FWRFWL
Dynamic EQ : On
MultEQ XT32 : Reference
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD
50.0
Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD
Blu-ray
Usage Data
To help us improve our products and customer service, Marantz collects
anonymous information about how you use this unit (such as frequently
used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings). Marantz will
never provide any information we collect to third parties.
Yes: Provide information on the operating status
of this unit.
No: Do not provide information on the operating
status of this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
258
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Save & Load
Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.
0Use a USB memory device that has at least 128 MB of free space and is formatted
to FAT32. Data may not Save/Load correctly to some USB memory devices.
0It may take up to 10 minutes for data to Save/Load. Do not turn off the power until
the process is complete.
oSave Configuration
Current unit settings are stored on the USB memory device.
When the settings are saved correctly, “Saved” appears on the display
and the file “config.avr” is created on the USB memory device.
0Do not change the file name of the created file. Doing so will prevent the file
from being recognized as a settings file when restoring.
oLoad Configuration
Settings saved on the USB memory device are restored.
When the saved settings are restored correctly, “Loaded” appears on
the display and the unit automatically restarts.
Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
oLock
On: Turn protection on.
Off
(Default):Turn protection off.
0When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.
NOTE
0When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup
Lock”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
259
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Reset
Returns settings to the factory default.
Initialization can be performed for all unit settings or for Network settings
only.
oAll Settings
All settings are reset to the factory default values.
oNetwork Settings
Only network settings are reset to the factory default values.
0Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the “Save & Load” function
from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the
unit. (v p. 259)
0The “Reset” operation can also be performed by using the button on the main unit.
For details on resetting all of the settings to the factory defaults see “Resetting
factory settings” (v p. 294), and for details on resetting the network settings to
the factory defaults see “Resetting network settings” (v p. 295).
NOTE
0Do not disconnect the power or turn the device off during network settings
initialization.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
260
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operating external devices with the remote control unit
.
Operation mode
indicators
OPTION
DEVICE
MENU
SETUP
MAIN
0 – 9
SMART
SELECT
1 – 4
Z2
Z3
Input source
select buttons
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it
can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players
or TVs made by different manufacturers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
261
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Registering preset codes
There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for
registering preset codes of Marantz players, the method for registering the
preset numbers of other manufacturers’ devices.
0“Registering Marantz players” (v p. 262)
0“Registering by entering preset numbers” (v p. 263)
oRegistering Marantz players
Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of
Marantz Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.
nRegistering Blu-ray Disc players
1Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until the
DEV., TV and AVP indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
nRegistering DVD players
1Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until the DEV.,
TV and AVP indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
nRegistering CD players
1Press and hold down CD and OPTION until the DEV., TV
and AVP indicators on the remote are flashing green,
then release.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
262
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nRegistering multiple players at the same time
1Press and hold down SMART SELECT 1 – 4 and
OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVP indicators on the
remote are flashing green, then release.
Devices to be registered at the
same time Press and hold down
the buttons
Blu-ray Disc
player
DVD player CD player
P P SMART SELECT 1 and
OPTION
P P SMART SELECT 2 and
OPTION
P P SMART SELECT 3 and
OPTION
P P P SMART SELECT 4 and
OPTION
NOTE
0Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons
may not operate. In this case, try “Registering by entering preset numbers”
(v p. 263).
oRegistering by entering preset numbers
The following table shows the device groups that can be registered for
each of the input source select buttons. Check the preset number of
the device you want to register beforehand in the “Remote Control
Preset Codes” file.
http://manuals.marantz.com/AV7705/preset/AV7705PresetCodes.pdf
Button Device groups that can be registered
CBL/SAT group
BD/DVD group
CBL/SAT group, BD/DVD group,
Audio group
CBL/SAT group
BD/DVD group
CBL/SAT group, BD/DVD group,
Audio group
CBL/SAT group, BD/DVD group,
Audio group
Audio group
TV group
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
263
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
1Press and hold down the input source button that you
want to register the preset code to and SETUP until the
DEV., TV and AVP indicators are flashing green.
2Enter the preset number (4 digits) listed for the device
in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 –
9) on the remote control.
0Some manufacturers use more than one type of preset code. Preset codes to
change the number and verify correct operation.
NOTE
0Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons
may not operate.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
264
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operating devices
To operate an external device, press the input source button registered
with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.
0The “DEV.” indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
0The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
0To operate the menu of this unit, press MAIN before operating the unit. The “AVP”
operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being operated.
nTV group
(TV) operation
Operation buttons Function
TV XTV power on/off
TV INPUT Switch TV input
TV MENU TV menu
CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER(Cursor) Enter
BACK Back
8 9Skip chapter
1Playback
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3Pause
2Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
0TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time
without pressing the TV button.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
265
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nDVD group
(DVD player / DVD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
nCD group
(CD player / CD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
INFO Information
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
0Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
266
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
nCBL/SAT group
(Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/
Media player/IP TV) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU Menu
CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
HOME Home menu
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
nBD group
(Blu-ray Disc player) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
HOME Home menu
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
0Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
267
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Initializing registered preset codes
1Press and hold down MAIN and OPTION until the DEV.,
TV and AVP indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
268
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting the back light
.
Light button
SETUP
You can turn off the backlight of the remote control unit.
0Backlight is set on in the factory settings.
Disabling the backlight
1Press and hold both SETUP and Light button until the
DEV., TV and AVP indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
0The backlight function can be turned on by performing step 1 again while the
backlight function is off.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
269
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit
.
Z2
Z3
MAIN
SETUP
To prevent accidental misuse, you can set the zone for which the remote
control unit is used.
1Press and hold down either MAIN, Z2 or Z3 and SETUP
at the same time until the DEV., TV and AVP indicators
flash green.
MAIN: When only using MAIN ZONE
Z2: When using MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
Z3
(Default):
When using MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and
ZONE3
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
270
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oContents
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 272
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power
on 272
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 272
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 272
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume
level 272
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content
such as TV and movies 272
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the
configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a
new one 273
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 273
I want to skip unused input sources 273
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 273
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a
game on my game console 273
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 273
Troubleshooting
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 275
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 276
Display on this unit shows nothing 276
No sound comes out 277
Desired sound does not come out 278
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 281
No video is shown on the TV 282
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 284
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on
the television is different from normal 284
AirPlay cannot be played back 285
USB memory devices cannot be played back 286
Bluetooth cannot be played back 287
The Internet radio cannot be played back 288
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 289
Various online services cannot be played 290
The HDMI Control function does not work 290
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network 291
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 292
Update/upgrade error messages 293
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
271
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake
0Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. (“ Volume ” (v p. 184), “ Volume Limit ” (v p. 250))
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on
0By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for “Power On Volume” in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (“ Volume ” (v p. 184), “ Power On
Volume ” (v p. 250))
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio
0Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you
can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 236)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer
0Use “Center Level Adjust” in the menu to adjust the level. (v p. 176)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level
0Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost
even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 186)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies
0Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level. (v p. 187)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
272
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one
0Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 210)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music
0Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while
listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, HEOS Music, USB or Bluetooth. (v p. 137)
I want to skip unused input sources
0Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the INPUT SELECTOR knob on
this unit. (v p. 207)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
0Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “Start”. You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in
MAIN ZONE. (v p. 139)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game on my game console
0When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set “Video Mode” in the menu to “Game”. (v p. 198)
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control
0Select “AV Receiver” in a TV menu such as “Input”z or “Operate Connected HDMI Device”z. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This
Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV.
zThe selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
273
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
0If steps 1 to 3 above do not improve the problem, restarting the device may improve the problem.
Continue pressing the X button on the unit until “Restart” appears in the display, or remove and re-insert the power cord of the unit.
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.
If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power
immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
274
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
Power does not turn on.
0Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. (v p. 88)
Power automatically turns off.
0The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. (v p. 155)
0“Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on
the menu to “Off”. (v p. 252)
The power to this unit does not turn off when you press the Power operation button. “ZONE2 On” or “ZONE3 On” appears on the display.
0Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on
the main unit or press the POWER X button after pressing the Z2 or Z3 button on the remote control unit.
The power to this unit does not turn off when you press the Power operation button. “HEOS On” appears on the display.
0A HEOS device on the same network is playing an input source from this unit. Stop playback on the HEOS device when turning this unit off (setting it to
standby). The power of this unit will turn off automatically after around 20 minutes.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
275
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit.
0Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. (v p. 9)
0Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°. (v p. 9)
0Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.
0Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. (v p. 9)
0The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the
remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
0The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the zone to
operate. (v p. 175)
0The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press MAIN to set the operating mode to AVP. (v p. 265)
0When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV
and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not
affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
Display on this unit shows nothing
Display is off.
0Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”. (v p. 253)
0When the sound mode is set to “Pure Direct”, the display is off. (v p. 142)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
276
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
No sound comes out
No sound comes out of speakers.
0Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 43)
0Insert connection cables all the way in.
0Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
0Check cables for damage.
0Check the speaker connections and configurations. (v p. 48)
0Check the connections for PRE OUT connectors. (v p. 43)
0Check whether the audio device power is turned on. (v p. 70)
0Check that a proper input source is selected. (v p. 90)
0Adjust the volume. (v p. 91)
0Cancel the mute mode. (v p. 91)
0Check the digital audio input connector setting. (v p. 205)
0Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default.
0When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.
No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection.
0When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a separate audio connection.
No sound comes out of a TV that is connected via HDMI.
0Audio signals input to 7.1CH IN connectors on this unit cannot be output to the TV.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
277
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Desired sound does not come out
The volume does not increase.
0The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit” on the menu. (v p. 184)
0Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
No sound comes out with the HDMI connection.
0Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. (v p. 71)
0When outputting HDMI audio signals from the speakers of a power amp connected to this unit, set “HDMI Audio Out” in the menu to “AVP”. To output
from the TV, set it to “TV”. (v p. 192)
0When using the HDMI Control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. (v p. 152)
When an eARC function-compatible television is connected, television audio is not output from the speaker connected to this unit
0eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this
setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television’s owner’s manual.
0Make sure the input source of this unit is “TV Audio”.
0The eARC function does not operate when the HDMI input connector is set to the “TV Audio” input source. To enable eARC function operation, remove
the HDMI input connector setting, then restart this unit and the television.
No sound comes out of a specific speaker.
0Check that PRE OUT cables and speaker cables are properly connected.
0Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu. (v p. 227)
0Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu. (v p. 221)
0When the sound mode is “Stereo” and “Virtual”, audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
278
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
No sound is produced from subwoofer.
0Check the subwoofer connections.
0Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
0Set “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu to “1 spkr” or “2 spkrs”. (v p. 228)
0When “Speaker Config.” - “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the
subwoofer. (v p. 228)
0When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (v p. 236)
0You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the “Subwoofer Mode” to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 236)
DTS sound is not output.
0Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”.
Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output.
0Make HDMI connections. (v p. 76)
0Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is set by default.
DTS Neural:X mode cannot be selected.
0DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones.
Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected.
0Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.
Sound modes other than “Stereo” or “Direct” cannot be selected.
0Only “Stereo” or “Direct” can be selected for the sound mode if Headphone:X signals are input.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
279
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ cannot be selected.
0These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. (v p. 210)
0Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. (v p. 142)
0Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ cannot be selected when sound mode is “DTS Virtual:X” or sound mode
that have “+ Virtual:X” in the sound mode name.
0These cannot be selected when using the headphones.
“M-DAX” cannot be selected.
0Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS
surround, “M-DAX” cannot be used. (v p. 182)
0Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. (v p. 142)
No audio is output from PRE OUT for ZONE2/ZONE3.
0In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.
0In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2
irrespective of the input signal format, set “HDMI Audio” in the menu to “PCM”. Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back
even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to “PCM (2ch)” on the played back device. (v p. 249)
0When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it
within a range of about 30 m.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
280
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted.
0When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted.
0The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.
When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit.
0When making a call, keep a distance of 20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.
Noise often occurs in FM/AM broadcasting.
0Change the antenna orientation or position. (v p. 82)
0Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
0Use an outdoor antenna. (v p. 82)
0Separate the antenna from other connection cables. (v p. 82)
The sounds appear to be distorted.
0Lower the volume. (v p. 91)
Sound cuts out when using Wi-Fi connection.
0The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, wireless game controllers and other wireless
LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be
improved using the following methods. (v p. 84)
- Install devices that cause interference away from this unit.
- Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference.
- Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual of the wireless router for details on how to
change the channel.)
- Switch to a wired LAN connection.
0Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case,
make the wired LAN connection. (v p. 241)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
281
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
No video is shown on the TV
No picture appears.
0Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 71)
0Insert connection cables all the way in.
0Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
0Check cables for damage.
0Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. (v p. 205)
0Check that the proper input source is selected. (v p. 90)
0Check the video input connector setting. (v p. 205)
0Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. (v p. 257)
0Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output
correctly. (v p. 298)
0To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 only.
0The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. (v p. 299)
0To play back a 4K (60/50Hz) video, use a “High Speed HDMI Cable” or an “High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet”. In order to achieve a higher fidelity
for 4K (60/50Hz) videos, it is recommended to use a “Premium High Speed HDMI Cables” or an “Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet” that
has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package.
No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection.
0With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).
(v p. 298)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
282
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
No video from an input source such as a game console is shown on the TV.
0When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the Video Conversion function may not function. Connect the input connector to the
monitor output connector of the same type.
While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV.
0The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during playback of the following video signals.
- Some images of 3D video contents
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- 4K video
- Some kind of HDR signals
When using HDMI ZONE2, the video output in MAIN ZONE is interrupted.
0When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
283
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
The menu screen or status information screen is not displayed on the TV.
0The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is connected to a TV using a different video output
connector, operate while watching the display on this unit.
0The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.
- Some images of 3D video content
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- Some kind of HDR signals
0When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly. (v p. 258)
0In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode.
(v p. 141)
0Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. (v p. 204)
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is
different from normal
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different.
0Performing operations on this unit during playback of a Dolby Vision signal may cause variance in the color display of the menu screen and operations
content. This is a characteristic of the Dolby Vision signal and is not a malfunction.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
284
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
AirPlay cannot be played back
The AirPlay icon is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
0This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit. (v p. 84)
0The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version.
Audio is not output.
0The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the
volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
0The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this
unit. (v p. 128)
Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
0Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay.
0Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance
from the wireless LAN access point.
iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit.
0Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through
the remote control unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
285
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
USB memory devices cannot be played back
USB memory device is not recognized.
0Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. (v p. 81)
0Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported.
0This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.
0The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32.
0Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive
compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
Files on the USB memory device are not displayed.
0Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 92)
0This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the
folder structure of the USB memory device.
0When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.
iOS and Android devices are not recognized.
0The USB port of this unit does not support playback from iOS and Android devices.
Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.
0Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. (v p. 301)
0You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
0Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
286
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Bluetooth cannot be played back
Bluetooth devices cannot be connected to this unit.
0The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner’s Manual of the Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.
0Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.
0The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.
0Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.
The sound is cut off.
0Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.
0Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit.
0To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices.
0Reconnect the Bluetooth device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
287
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
The Internet radio cannot be played back
A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed.
0The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. (v p. 84)
0Perform the network diagnostic mode.
Internet Radio cannot be played.
0The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and
AAC. (v p. 304)
0The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting.
0The IP address is not properly set. (v p. 243)
0Check the power of the router is on.
0To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to “On” on this unit. (v p. 243)
0To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address on this unit. (v p. 243)
0Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or
select another radio station. (v p. 113)
0The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.
Cannot connect to favorite radio stations.
0Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
288
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Files stored on a computer cannot be played.
0Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. (v p. 303)
0Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
0The USB port of this unit cannot be used for connection to a computer.
0Media sharing settings on the server or NAS do not allow this unit. Change the settings to allow this unit. For details, see the owner’s manual of the
server or NAS.
Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.
0The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
0Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
0Server is not running. Launch the server.
0IP address of this unit is wrong. Check the IP address of this unit. (v p. 240)
Music files on PC cannot be played back.
0Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC to this unit through the network. (v p. 84)
Files on PC or NAS are not displayed.
0Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 303)
Music stored on a NAS cannot be played.
0If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting.
0If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player’s media sharing function and add
NAS to the selected play folder.
0If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
289
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Various online services cannot be played
Various online services cannot be played.
0The online service may have been discontinued.
The HDMI Control function does not work
The HDMI Control function does not work.
0Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”. (v p. 194)
0You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI Control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the
HDMI Control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly. (v p. 152)
0Check that the HDMI Control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. (v p. 152)
0When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this
unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again. (v p. 152)
0The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. Use the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.
(v p. 71)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
290
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
Cannot connect to the network.
0The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting
details of this unit. (v p. 242)
0Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the
unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points.
0Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks.
0This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).
Cannot connect to a WPS Router.
0Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating.
0Press the WPS button on the router and then press the “Connect” button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes.
0A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to “None”, “WPA-PSK (AES)” or WPA2-PSK (AES).
(v p. 242)
0If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS button on the router. In this case, use the “Scan
Networks” or “Manual” method to connect.
Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad.
0Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version.
0When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
291
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
When using MAIN ZONE, video output is interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
0With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
When using HDMI ZONE2, no video or audio is output from the TV in ZONE2.
0Check that the power is on for ZONE2. (v p. 169)
0Check the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 169)
0The AUX1-HDMI connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function.
0In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals.
0When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to “PCM” on the playback device. Alternatively, set
“ZONE2 Setup” - “HDMI Audio” in the menu to “PCM”. (v p. 249)
0When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution
that is compatible with the TV.
When using HDMI ZONE2, MAIN ZONE audio is played back as PCM.
0When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
292
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Update/upgrade error messages
If an update/upgrade is interrupted or fails, an error message appears.
Display Description
Connection failed. Please check your network, then try
again.
The network connection is unstable.
Connection to the server failed.
Check your network environment and try the update again.
Update failed. Please check your network, then try
again.
The download of the firmware failed.
Check your network environment and try the update again.
Upgrade failed. Please check your network, then try
again.
The download of the firmware failed.
Check your network environment and try the upgrade again.
Please check your network, unplug and reconnect the
power cord, and try again.
The update failed.
Press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the
power cord.
The update restarts automatically.
Please contact customer service in your area. This unit may be broken.
Contact our Customer Service Center in your area.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
293
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Resetting factory settings
If the indicators are incorrect or the unit cannot be operated, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before
returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 274)
If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.
.
XGAME
INFO
1Turn off the power using X.
2Press X while simultaneously pressing GAME and
INFO.
3Remove your fingers from the two buttons when
“Initialized” appears on the display.
0Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the “Save & Load” function
from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the
unit. (v p. 259)
0You can also reset all settings to the factory defaults using “Reset” - “All Settings”
in the menu. (v p. 260)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
294
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Resetting network settings
If network contents cannot be played or the unit cannot connect to the network, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the
unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 274)
If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.
Network settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.
However, the menu “Amp Assign”, “Speaker Config.” and “Video” settings are not reset.
.
XENTER
BACKINPUT SELECTOR
1Press X to turn on power to the unit.
2Turn INPUT SELECTOR to select “HEOS Music”.
3Press and hold the main unit's BACK and ENTER at the
same time for at least 3 seconds.
4Remove your fingers from the two buttons when
“Network Reset...” appears on the display.
5“Completed” is shown in the display when reset is
complete.
0Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the “Save & Load” function
from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the
unit. (v p. 259)
0You can also reset the network settings to the factory defaults using “Reset” -
“Network Settings” in the menu. (v p. 260)
NOTE
0Do not turn the power off until reset is complete.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
295
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is
an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier.
With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio
formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not
possible with the analog video transmission.
Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be
transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional
connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately
for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring
configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system.
This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0Deep Color
An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr,
which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024
shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce
colors in higher definition.
Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
0x.v.Color
This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables
display with natural, vivid colors.
“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.
03D
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals
of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that
provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
04K
This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video
signals of HDMI.
0Content Type
It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type
(content information).
0Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider
color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
0sYCC601 color
Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is
larger than the traditional RGB color model.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
296
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0Auto Lip Sync
This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and
video.
Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
0HDMI Pass Through
Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from
the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is
connected to the HDMI output connector.
0HDMI Control
If you connect the unit and an HDMI Control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI Control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
0Power off link
This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
0Audio output destination switching
From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or
the AV pre tuner.
0Volume adjustment
You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
0Input source switching
You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input
switching.
When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.
0ARC (Audio Return Channel)
This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through
the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit
based on the HDMI Control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,
video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are
transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the
TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate
audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI
connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from
the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this
unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback
on this unit for the TV.
0eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
The eARC function is an extension of the conventional ARC function. It
utilizes dedicated eARC function control to play back television audio
from this unit without passing through HDMI control. Furthermore, the
eARC function can transmit multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats
not compatible with conventional ARC. Connecting to an eARC
function-compatible television also enables enjoyment of higher-
quality surround playback of the audio content played from your
television.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
297
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oSupported audio formats
2-channel Linear
PCM
2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Multi-channel
Linear PCM
7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Bitstream
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD /
Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio /
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express
DSD 2-channel – 5.1-channel, 2.8 MHz
oSupported video signals
0480i 0480p
0576i 0576p
0720p 60/50Hz 01080i 60/50Hz
01080p 60/50/24Hz 04K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD
video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to
support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright
protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of
the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio
are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or
player for more information.
0When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K,
ARC and eARC functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that
bears the HDMI logo.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
298
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.
0The MAIN ZONE Video Conversion
function is compatible with the
following formats: NTSC, PAL,
SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M
and PAL-60.
0When component video signals are
used, only 480i and 576i signals are
converted to HDMI signals.
HDMI-compatible TV
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input (IN)
Video signal Video signal
Component
video signal
HDMI signal
Output
Video device This unit
HDMI-incompatible TV
HDMI signal
HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector
Component
video signal
Component video
connectors
Component
video connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
299
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for “Resolution” in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 199)
.
Output signal
Input signal
HDMI
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p 24Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz
HDMI
480i/576i 
480p/576p 
720p 
1080i 
1080p 24Hz 
1080p 
4K 30/25/24Hz
4K 60/50Hz z
Component Video
480i/576i 
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
Video 480i/576i 
zThe HDMI connector on the front panel supports YCbCr 4:2:0 format only.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
300
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back a USB memory devices
0This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not
be played back properly.
oCompatible formats
Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate Extension
WMAz132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel – .wav
MPEG-4 AACz132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 16 – 320 kbps .aac/.m4a/.mp4
FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel – .flac
Apple Losslessz232/44.1/48/88.2/
96/192 kHz 2-channel – .m4a
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel – .dsf/.dff
z1Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be
copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
301
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oMaximum number of playable files and folder
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by
this unit are as follows.
Media
Item USB memory device
Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB
Number of folder directory levels z18 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of filesz25000
z1The limited number includes the root folder.
z2The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.
Playing back a Bluetooth device
This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.
0A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected,
monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
0AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the
Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
oAbout Bluetooth communications
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation
of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and
Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference
may cause malfunctions.
0Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated
0Near automatic doors and fire alarms
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
302
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
0This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then
music may not be played back properly.
0A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
For playing mentioned audio formats via a network a server software, for example Twonky Media Server or jRiver Media Server, needs to be installed
on your computer or NAS for full support. There are other server software available too. Please check supported formats.
oSpecifications of supported files
Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate Extension
WMAz132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel – .wav
MPEG-4 AACz132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 16 – 320 kbps .aac/.m4a/.mp4
FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel – .flac
Apple Losslessz232/44.1/48/88.2/
96/192 kHz 2-channel – .m4a
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel – .dsf/.dff
z1Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be
copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
303
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back Internet Radio
oPlayable broadcast station specifications
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192
kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320
kbps .mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
Personal memory plus function
The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound
mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic
Volume, M-DAX and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.
0“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the
standby mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
304
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sound modes and channel output
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.”. (v p. 227)
.
S Dz5
SDDDz4Dz4Dz4Dz4Dz4Dz4Dz4Dz4Dz4D
S Dz5
SDD D
Stereo
S D
Dolby Atmos
SDDDDDDDD D D D D
Dolby TrueHD
SDDDz4Dz4D
Dolby Digital Plus
SDDDz4Dz4D
Dolby Digital
SDD D
Dolby Surround
z1SDDDz6DDDDD D D D D
DTS:X
SDDDDDDDDD D D D D
DTS-HD
SDDDz4Dz4D
DTS Express
SDDD D
DTS 96/24
SDDD D
DTS Surround
SDDD D
DTS Neural:X
z2SDDDDDDDDDD D D D D
DTS Virtual:X
z3SDDD D
Auro-3D
SDDDD Dz7DDz8Dz9Dz9Dz9D
Auro-2D Surround
SDDD D
Multi Ch In
SDDDz4D
Multi Ch Stereo
SDDDz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 Dz10 D
Virtual
S D
DSD Direct (Multi-channel)
DSD Direct (2-channel)
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)
Subwoofer
Back Dolby
Atmos
Enabled
L/R
Surround
Dolby
Atmos
Enabled
L/R
Front Dolby
Atmos
Enabled
L/R
Top
Surround
Surround
Height
L/R
Rear
Height
L/R
Top Rear
L/R
Top
Middle
L/R
Top Front
L/R
Front
Height
L/R
Surround
Back
L/R
Surround
L/R
Center
Front
L/R
Channel output
Sound mode
z1 - z10: “Sound modes and channel output” (v p. 306)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
305
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
z1The applicable sound mode includes “Dolby Surround” and sound modes that have “+Dolby Surround” in the sound mode name.
z2The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neural:X” and sound modes that have “+Neural:X” in the sound mode name.
z3The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Virtual:X” and sound modes that have “+Virtual:X” in the sound mode name.
z4A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z5 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 236)
z6 Audio is not output when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” in the menu is set to “1 spkr”. (v p. 229)
z7For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in
place of Surround Height speakers.
z8This is output if an Auro-3D signal is input and the input signal contains Top Surround.
z9For the best Auro-3D experience Front Height and Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
z10 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Surround Parameter” – “Speaker Select” settings. (v p. 181)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
306
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sound modes and surround parameters
.
z2z3z4
z5z6
z1SS Sz7
z1SSSS
Sz7
Stereo
SSSS Sz8
Dolby Atmos
SSS S
Dolby TrueHD
SSS S
Dolby Digital Plus
SSS S
Dolby Digital
SSS S
Dolby Surround
SSS S
DTS:X
S SSS S
DTS-HD
SS
DTS Express
SS
DTS 96/24
SS
DTS Surround
SSS
DTS Neural:X
SSS
DTS Virtual:X
SS
Auro-3D
SSSz9Sz9
Auro-2D Surround
SS
Multi Ch In
SS
Multi Ch Stereo
SSSSSS
Virtual
SSSS
DSD Direct (Multi-channel)
DSD Direct (2-channel)
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)
Subwoofer
Auro-Matic
3D Strength
Auro-Matic
3D Preset
DTS Neural:X
Center Spread
Speaker
Select
Low
Frequency
Effects
Dialog Control
Dynamic
Compression
Loudness
Management
Cinema EQ
Surround Parameter
Sound mode
z1 - z9 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 309)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
307
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
z10 z11
z12
Audyssey M-DAX
z17
Bass Sync
z18
MultEQ
®
XT32
z13z14
Dynamic EQ
z15z16
Dynamic Volume
z15z16
Audyssey LFC™
z15z16
z1Sz7
z1SS
Sz7
SS
Stereo
SSz8SSSSSS
Dolby Atmos
SSSSSSS S
Dolby TrueHD
SSSSSSS S
Dolby Digital Plus
SSSSSSS S
Dolby Digital
SSSSSSS S
Dolby Surround
SSSSSSSS
DTS:X
SSSSSSS S
DTS-HD
SSSSSSS S
DTS Express
SSSSSSS S
DTS 96/24
SSSSSSS S
DTS Surround
SSSSSSS S
DTS Neural:X
SSSSSSSS
DTS Virtual:X
SSSS S
Auro-3D SSSSSSSSS
Auro-2D Surround SSSSSSSSS
Multi Ch In
SSSSSSS S
Multi Ch Stereo
SSSSSSSSS
Virtual
S SSSSSSS
DSD Direct (Multi-channel)
DSD Direct (2-channel)
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)
Subwoofer Level
Adjust
Center Level
Adjust
Tone
Sound mode
z1, z7, z8, z10 - z18: “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 309)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
308
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
z1During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode.
z2This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played.
z3This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or DTS signal is played.
z4This item can be selected when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.
z5This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z6This item can be selected when Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are used.
z7 This setting is available when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 236)
z8 This item can be set when “Front” is set to “Small” or “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 227, 236)
z9This can be set if the input signal does not contain an Auro-3D signal or if the input Auro-3D signal does not contain Front Height channels.
z10 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 186)
z11 This item cannot be set when “Center” is set to “None”. (v p. 228)
z12 This item cannot be set when “Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”. (v p. 228)
z13 This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.
z14 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.
z15 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ® XT32” in the menu is set to “Off”. (v p. 185)
z16 This item cannot be set when sound mode is “DTS Virtual:X” or sound mode that have “+Virtual:X” in the sound mode name.
z17 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
z18 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
309
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
.
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
Dolby
Atmos
Dolby
TrueHD
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Dolby
Digital
(EX)
DTS:X DTS-HD DTS
Express
DTS ES
Dscrt6.1
DTS ES
Mtrx6.1 DTS Auro-3D
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
Direct
Direct
SSSz2S SSSSSSSSSSS
DSD Direct
S S
Pure Direct
Pure Direct
SSS S SSSSSSSSSSS
DSD Pure Direct
S S
Stereo
Stereo
SSFF S SSSSSSSSSSSS
Dolby Surround
Dolby Atmos
z1F
Dolby TrueHD
Sz3S Sz4
Dolby Digital Plus
Sz5S
Dolby Digital
S
Dolby (D+) (HD) + Dolby Surround
FFF Sz4
Dolby (D+) (HD) + Neural:X
SSS Sz4
Dolby Surround
FSSS
PCM
multi-
channel
Analog /
PCM
Multi-channel signal
2-channel signal
NOTE
Sound mode
z1 - z5: “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 312)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
310
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
Dolby
Atmos
Dolby
TrueHD
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Dolby
Digital
(EX)
DTS:X DTS-HD DTS
Express
DTS ES
Dscrt6.1
DTS ES
Mtrx6.1 DTS Auro-3D
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
DTS Surround
DTS:X MSTR / DTS:X
F
DTS-HD MSTR
Sz11 Sz12
DTS-HD HI RES
Sz13
DTS Express
S
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1
z6S
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1
z6S
DTS 96/24
Sz14
DTS Surround
SSS
DTS (-HD) + Dolby Surround
SSSSSSz12
DTS (-HD) + Neural:X
z7FFFFFSz12
DTS (-HD) / DTS:X + Virtual:X
z8SSSSSSSz12
DTS Neural:X
z7SFSS
DTS Virtual:X
z9SSS
Auro-3D
Auro-3D
z10 SSSS SSS SSSSSSSS
Auro-2D Surround
z10 SSSS SSS SSSSSSSS
Multi Ch In
Multi Ch In
Sz15 FF
Multi Ch In 7.1
z6Sz16
Multi In + Dolby Surround
SS
Multi In + Neural:X
SS
Multi In + Virtual:X
SS
Multi Ch Stereo
SSSS S SSSSSSSSSSSS
Virtual
SSSSSz17 SSSSSSSSSSSS
Original sound mode
PCM
multi-
channel
Analog /
PCM
Multi-channel signal
2-channel signal
NOTE
Sound mode
z6 - z17 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 312)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
311
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
z1This item can be selected when using any of the Surround Back, Front Height, Top Front, Top Middle, Top Rear, Rear Height, Front Dolby, Surround Dolby or Back Dolby
speaker.
z2The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is “Direct”.
z3This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal.
z4This item can be selected if the Auro-3D signal contains Dolby TrueHD.
z5This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal.
z6This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.
z7This item cannot be selected when a DTS(-HD) format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.
z8This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.
z9This item cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
z10 This item cannot be selected if the sampling frequency of the input signal is 32 kHz.
z11 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio.
z12 This item can be selected if the Auro-3D signal contains DTS-HD Master Audio.
z13 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution.
z14 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.
z15 This item can be selected if the Auro-3D signal contains Multi Channel PCM.
z16 This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.
z17 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
312
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Explanation of terms
oAudyssey
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality
as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and
room acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level
between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
clarity remain the same.
Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing
people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC™ dynamically
monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass
through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic
processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room.
The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates
any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every
listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements,
MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both
time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also
performs a fully automated surround system setup.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
313
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAuro-3D
Auro-3D®
The Auro-3D® technology suite is a groundbreaking new audio technology
that combines height-based listening formats with powerful creative tools
to deliver an unrivaled three-dimensional sound experience. Auro-3D® is
the general format name for Sound in 3D and its related speaker lay-outs.
Auro-Matic®
Auro-Matic® up-mixing technology software is a unique creative tool that
transforms legacy Mono, Stereo and Surround content into a natural 3D or
2D listening experience.
oDolby
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of
dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos
is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio
as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and
move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during
playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height
plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos Enabled AV
pre tuner via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc,
downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room.
This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV pre tuner and
scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of
every size and configuration.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
314
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2
surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequency effects.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround
sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is
upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater
flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the
playback device.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently
up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround
speaker system. Dolby Surround is compatible with traditional speaker
layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-
ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos
Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for
reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers
feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These
features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker
module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while
providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and
Dolby Surround playback.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the
sound of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
315
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oDTS
Dialog Control
Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out
from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired.
This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio
system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic
surround sound experience, and is found in the world’s finest movie
theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in
5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to
5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround
back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also
possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-
channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced
functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional
audio for Blu-ray Disc.
This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high
sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels
are supported in Blu-ray Disc.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
316
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional
DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling
frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital
sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This
format is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital
Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8
audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and
up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit
resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS:X
DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient
backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to
move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.
DTS Neural:X
Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X
can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all
speakers in your surround sound system.
DTS Virtual:X
DTS Virtual:X allows you to enjoy multi-dimensional sound regardless of
room size, layout, or speaker configuration.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
317
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oAudio
Apple Lossless Audio Codec
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by
Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data
compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly
the same original data.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio
file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss
in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output
channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system
subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,
using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound
quality equivalent to a music CD.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
318
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for
the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1
Video”, “MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player.
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft
Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at
regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in
digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling
frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω (ohms).
Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Dialogue normalization function
This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the
minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a
lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s
configuration.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
319
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oVideo
ISF
ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video
technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment
to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the
optimization of device video performance.
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video
as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and jagged edges.
oNetwork
AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
WEP Key (network key)
This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data
transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and
decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for
communications to be established between them.
Wi-Fi®
Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi
Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to
the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also
uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger
security.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)
This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
320
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a
preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and
client.
Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network
names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication
is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is
suitable for constructing a simplified network.
oOthers
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright
protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being
copied without authorization.
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
Pairing
Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a
Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices
authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections
occurring.
When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this
unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
Protection circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply
when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over
temperature for any reason.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
321
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Trademark information
.
Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro and iPhone are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The trademark "iPhone" is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone
K.K.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ are registered
trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
.
Manufactured under license from Auro Technologies.
Auro-3D® and the related symbols are registered trademarks of Auro
Technologies. All materials contained in this work are protected by
copyright law and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted,
displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of
Auro Technologies NV or in case of third party materials, the owner of
that content. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or
other notice from copies of the content.
Auro Technologies: mail info@auro-technologies.com,
phone +32-(0)-14314343, fax +32-(0)-14321224,
www.auro-technologies.com
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
322
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc.
is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X,
the DTS:X logo, Virtual:X, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered
trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or
other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
Administrator, Inc.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the
interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies
interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
323
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Specifications
oAudio section
0Analog
Input sensitivity: 200 mV
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (Direct mode)
S/N: 105 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (Direct mode)
Rated output: Unbalanced RCA pre-output: 1.2 V
Balanced XLR pre-output: 2.4 V
0Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
0Phono equalizer
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
324
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oVideo section
0Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB
0Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB
oTuner section [FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)
Reception frequency range: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz 522 kHz – 1611 kHz
Effective sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV
50 dB sensitivity: MONO ― 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)
S/N ratio: MONO ― 70 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
STEREO ― 67 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
Distortion: MONO ― 0.7 % (1 kHz)
STEREO ― 1.0 % (1 kHz)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
325
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oWireless LAN section
Network type (wireless LAN standard): Conforming to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
(Wi-Fi® compliant) z1
Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit
WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
z1The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
oBluetooth section
Communications system: Bluetooth Specification Version 3.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Transmission power: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 1
Maximum communication range: Approx. 30 m in line of sight z2
Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz
Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Supported profiles: A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.5
Corresponding codec: SBC
Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz – 20,000 Hz
z2The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from
microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
326
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oGeneral
Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 60 W
Power consumption in standby modes:
Standby modes
Setting items in the menu
Power consumption
Network Control
(v p. 245)
Allow Update
(v p. 255)
HDMI Pass Through
(v p. 192) /
HDMI Control
(v p. 194)
Normal standby Off In Standby Off Off 0.2 W
Network control (Bluetooth) Always On – Off 3.3 W
Network control (Ethernet) Always On – Off 3.4 W
Network control (Wi-Fi) Always On – Off 3.7 W
CEC standby Off In Standby Off On 0.5 W
RS-232C standby zOff In Standby Off Off 0.5 W
zWhen this unit is in standby mode by sending a standby command from the external controller via the RS-232C connector of this unit.
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
327
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
oDimensions (Unit : mm)
.
50
53 40 12
171
185
247
36118 32
411
267
392
20
50 340
14
440
60
oWeight: 10.4 kg
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
328
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Index
v Numerics
11.1-channel .................................................. 62
3D ................................................................ 296
4K ................................................................ 296
5.1-channel .............................................. 40, 50
7.1-channel .............................................. 40, 51
9.1-channel .................................................... 55
v A
AirPlay .......................................................... 127
All Zone Stereo ............................................ 139
Audio formats ....................... 298, 301, 303, 304
Audio settings ....................................... 171, 176
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 313
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 313
Audyssey LFC™ .......................................... 313
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 313
Audyssey settings ................................ 185, 212
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ ............................... 211
Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 210
Auto sound mode ......................................... 143
Auto Standby ............................................... 252
v B
Bi-amp ............................................................ 68
Bluetooth device ............................................ 97
Blu-ray Disc player ................................... 77, 91
v C
Cable TV ........................................................ 76
v D
Direct sound mode ....................................... 147
Display ........................................................... 22
Dolby Atmos ................................................. 314
Dolby sound mode ............................... 144, 315
DTS sound mode ................................. 145, 316
DVD player ............................................... 77, 91
v E
External control device ................................... 86
v F
Firmware Update .......................................... 254
FM/AM antenna ...................................... 82, 102
Front panel ..................................................... 17
v G
Game console ................................................ 78
General settings ................................... 174, 248
v H
HDCP ........................................................... 298
HDMI Control ....................................... 152, 194
HEOS Account ..................................... 119, 247
HEOS Favorites ........................................... 133
v I
Input Assign ................................................. 205
Input settings ........................................ 172, 205
Input signal ................................................... 310
Input source ................................................... 90
Internet Radio ............................................... 112
v L
Listening position ......................................... 210
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
329
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
v M
M-DAX ......................................................... 182
Menu map .................................................... 171
Muting ............................................................ 91
v N
NAS ............................................................. 114
Network settings .......................................... 240
v O
Original sound mode .................................... 146
v P
Pairing ...................................................... 97, 99
PC ................................................................ 114
PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 146
Picture Mode ................................................ 190
Power amp connection ................................... 43
Protection circuit .......................................... 321
Pure direct .................................................... 142
v Q
Queue ............................................ 93, 115, 122
v R
Rear panel ...................................................... 26
Remote control unit ........................................ 30
Resetting factory settings ............................. 294
Resetting network settings ........................... 295
v S
Satellite tuner ................................................. 76
Set-top box ..................................................... 76
Setup Assistant ............................................ 174
Sleep timer ................................................... 155
Smart select ................................................. 157
Sound mode ................................. 141, 305, 307
Speaker settings .................................. 172, 210
Spotify .......................................................... 131
Stereo sound mode ...................................... 147
v T
Tips .............................................................. 272
Troubleshooting ........................................... 274
TV ....................................................... 71, 73, 74
v U
USB memory device ................................ 81, 92
v V
Video camcorder ............................................ 78
Video Conversion ................................. 198, 299
Video Select ................................................. 137
Video settings ....................................... 171, 190
Volume ................................................... 91, 135
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
330
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
v W
Web control .................................................. 164
Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 241
Wired LAN .............................................. 84, 240
Wireless LAN ......................................... 85, 241
v Z
ZONE2/ZONE3 ............................................ 166
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
331
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
3520 10621 00AMB
Copyright © 2018 D&M Holdings Inc. All Rights Reserved.
343
… 297 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Marantz AV7705 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Marantz AV7705 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 17.34 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Marantz AV7705

Marantz AV7705 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 332 pagina's

Marantz AV7705 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 332 pagina's

Marantz AV7705 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 332 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info